This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

# MSC.

Patran Reference Manual Contents iii

Options

Close

Return

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

s s

Overview of Capabilities, 2 Concepts and Definitions, 4 ❑ Parameterization, 5 ❑ Topology, 10 - Topological Congruency and Meshing, 12 ❑ Connectivity, 15 ❑ Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran, 17 ❑ Global Model Tolerance & Geometry, 18 Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran, 19 ❑ Trimmed Surfaces, 20 ❑ Solids, 24 ❑ Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25 - Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry, 25 ❑ Matrix of Geometry Types Created, 27 Building An Optimal Geometry Model, 30 ❑ Building a Congruent Model, 31 ❑ Building Optimal Surfaces, 33 ❑ Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 37 ❑ Building B-rep Solids, 40 ❑ Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids, 41

s

s

2

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

s s

Overview, 46 Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry, 47 ❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, 47 ❑ Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, 55 PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry, 57

s

3

Coordinate Frames

s s s

Coordinate Frame Definitions, 60 Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames, 63 Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames, 66

4

Create Actions

s

Overview of Geometry Create Action, 70

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents iv

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

s

Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 74 ❑ Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method), 74 ❑ Create Point ArcCenter, 79 ❑ Extracting Points, 81 - Extracting Points from Curves and Edges, 81 - Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces, 84 - Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 86 - Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces, 88 - Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface, 90 ❑ Interpolating Points, 91 - Between Two Points, 91 - Interpolating Points on a Curve, 94 ❑ Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points, 97 ❑ Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance, 107 ❑ Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points, 109 ❑ Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces, 112 ❑ Creating Curves Between Points, 117 - Creating Curves Through 2 Points, 117 - Creating Curves Through 3 Points, 119 - Creating Curves Through 4 Points, 123 ❑ Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method), 128 ❑ Creating Chained Curves, 131 ❑ Creating Conic Curves, 133 ❑ Extracting Curves From Surfaces, 137 - Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option, 137 - Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option, 142 ❑ Creating Fillet Curves, 144 ❑ Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points, 148 ❑ Creating Curves at Intersections, 150 - Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces, 150 - Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface, 154 - Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form, 157 - Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes, 158 ❑ Manifold Curves Onto a Surface, 160 - Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option, 160 - Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option, 164 - Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form, 167 ❑ Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal Method), 168 ❑ Creating Offset Curves, 171 - Creating Constant Offset Curve, 171 - Creating Variable Offset Curve, 173 - Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve, 174 ❑ Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces, 176 - Project Parameters Subordinate Form, 182 ❑ Creating Piecewise Linear Curves, 183

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents v

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑

Creating Spline Curves, 185 - Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option, 185 - Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option, 189 Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method), 193 Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points (TanPoint Method), 195 Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ Method), 199 Creating Involute Curves, 203 - Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option, 203 - Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option, 206 Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 208 Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method), 214 - Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option, 214 - Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option, 218 Creating 2D Circle Curves, 222 Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves, 226 Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method), 229 - Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option, 229 - Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option, 233 - Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form, 236 Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method), 237 Creating Surfaces from Curves, 240 - Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves, 240 - Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method), 243 - Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method), 246 - Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method), 248 Creating Composite Surfaces, 250 Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces, 255 Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method), 257 Extracting Surfaces, 260 - Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option, 260 - Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option, 264 Creating Fillet Surfaces, 266 Matching Adjacent Surfaces, 270 Creating Constant Offset Surface, 272 Creating Ruled Surfaces, 274 Creating Trimmed Surfaces, 278 - Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option, 280 - Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option, 281 - Auto Chain Subordinate Form, 282 - Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option, 284 Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method), 287 Extruding Surfaces and Solids, 289 Gliding Surfaces, 294 - Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option, 294

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents vi

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling - Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option, 296 Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method, 298 Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method), 305 - Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form, 306 Creating Midsurfaces, 307 - Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option, 307 - Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option, 309 Creating Solid Primitives, 311 - Creating a Solid Block, 311 - Creating Solid Cylinder, 314 - Creating Solid Sphere, 317 - Creating Solid Cone, 320 - Creating Solid Torus, 323 - Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation, 326 Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method), 327 - Creating Solids from Two Surfaces, 327 - Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method), 330 - Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method), 333 - Creating Solids with the N Surface Option, 336 Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid, 338 Creating a Decomposed Solid, 340 Creating Solids from Faces, 343 Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method), 346 Gliding Solids, 348

❑ ❑ ❑

❑

❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ s

Creating Coordinate Frames, 350 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method, 350 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method, 353 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method, 355 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method, 358 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method, 361 ❑ Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method, 362 Creating Planes, 363 ❑ Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method, 363 ❑ Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method, 365 ❑ Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method, 367 - Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option, 367 - Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric Option, 369 ❑ Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method, 371 ❑ Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method, 372 - Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option, 372 - Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option, 374 ❑ Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method, 375 - Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option, 375 - Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option, 377

s

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents vii

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling - Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option, 379 Creating Planes with the Offset Method, 381 Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method, 383 - Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option, 383 - Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric Option, 385 Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method, 387

❑ ❑

❑ s

Creating Vectors, 389 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method, 389 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method, 391 - Between Two Points, 391 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method, 393 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Normal Method, 395 - Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option, 395 - Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option, 397 - Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option, 399 ❑ Creating Vectors with the Product Method, 402 ❑ Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method, 404

5

Delete Actions

s s s s

Overview of the Geometry Delete Action, 408 Deleting Any Geometric Entity, 409 Deleting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes or Vectors, 410 Deleting Coordinate Frames, 411

6

Edit Actions

s s

Overview of the Edit Action Methods, 414 Editing Points, 416 ❑ Equivalencing Points, 416 Editing Curves, 418 ❑ Breaking Curves, 418 - Breaking a Curve at a Point, 418 - Breaking a Curve at a Parametric Location, 422 - Breaking a Curve at a Plane Location, 425 ❑ Blending a Curve, 426 ❑ Disassembling a Chained Curve, 429 ❑ Extending Curves, 431 - Extending a Curve With the 1 Curve Option, 431 - Extending a Curve Using the Through Points Type, 436 - Extending a Curve Using the Full Circle Type, 438

s

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents viii

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling - Extending a Curve With the 2 Curve Option, 440 Merging Existing Curves, 443 Refitting Existing Curves, 447 Reversing a Curve, 448 Trimming Curves, 451 - Trimming a Curve With the Point Option, 451 - Trimming a Curve Using the Parametric Option, 454

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

s

Editing Surfaces, 457 ❑ Surface Break Options, 457 - Breaking a Surface With the Curve Option, 457 - Breaking a Surface With the Surface Option, 461 - Breaking a Surface With the Plane Option, 463 - Breaking a Surface With the Point Option, 465 - Breaking a Surface Using the 2 Point Option, 469 - Breaking a Surface With the Parametric Option, 471 ❑ Blending Surfaces, 475 ❑ Disassembling Trimmed Surfaces, 478 ❑ Matching Surface Edges, 481 - Matching Surface Edges with the 2 Surface Option, 481 - Matching Surface Edges with the Surface-Point Option, 484 ❑ Extending Surfaces, 486 - Extending Surfaces with the 2 Surface Option, 486 - Extending Surfaces to a Curve, 488 - Extending Surfaces to a Plane, 490 - Extending Surfaces to a Point, 492 - Extending Surfaces to a Surface, 494 - Extending Surfaces with the Percentage Option, 496 - Extending Surfaces with the Fixed Length Option, 498 ❑ Refitting Surfaces, 500 ❑ Reversing Surfaces, 501 ❑ Sewing Surfaces, 503 ❑ Trimming Surfaces to an Edge, 505 ❑ Adding a Fillet to a Surface, 507 ❑ Removing Edges from Surfaces, 508 - Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Option, 508 - Removing Edges from Surfaces with Edge Length Option, 509 ❑ Adding a Hole to Surfaces, 510 - Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Center Point Option, 510 - Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Project Vector Option, 512 - Adding a Hole to Surfaces with the Inner Loop Option, 514 ❑ Removing a Hole from Trimmed Surfaces, 516 ❑ Adding a Vertex to Surfaces, 518 ❑ Removing a Vertex from Trimmed Surfaces, 520 Editing Solids, 522 ❑ Breaking Solids, 522

s

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents ix

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling - Breaking Solids with the Point Option, 522 - Breaking Solids with the Parametric Option, 526 - Breaking Solids with the Curve Option, 531 - Breaking Solids with the Plane Option, 533 - Breaking Solids with the Surface Option, 535 Blending Solids, 538 Disassembling B-rep Solids, 541 Refitting Solids, 543 - Refitting Solids with the To TriCubicNet Option, 543 - Refitting Solids with the To TriParametric Option, 544 - Refitting Solids with the To Parasolid Option, 545 Reversing Solids, 546 Solid Boolean Operation Add, 548 Solid Boolean Operation Subtract, 550 Solid Boolean Operation Intersect, 552 Creating Solid Edge Blends, 554 - Creating Constant Radius Edge Blends from Solid Edges, 554 - Creating Chamfer Edge Blend from Solid Edges, 556 Imprinting Solid on Solid, 558 Solid Shell Operation, 560

❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑

❑ ❑ s

Editing Features, 562 ❑ Suppressing a Feature, 562 ❑ Unsuppressing a Feature, 563 ❑ Editing Feature Parameters, 564 ❑ Feature Parameter Definition, 565

7

Show Actions

s

Overview of the Geometry Show Action Methods, 568 ❑ The Show Action Information Form, 569 Showing Points, 570 ❑ Showing Point Locations, 570 ❑ Showing Point Distance, 571 - Showing Point Distance with the Point Option, 571 - Showing Point Distance with the Curve Option, 573 - Showing Point Distance with the Surface Option, 575 - Showing Point Distance with the Plane Option, 577 - Showing Point Distance with the Vector Option, 579 ❑ Showing the Nodes on a Point, 581 Showing Curves, 582 ❑ Showing Curve Attributes, 582 ❑ Showing Curve Arc, 583 ❑ Showing Curve Angle, 584 ❑ Showing Curve Length Range, 586

s

s

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents x

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

❑ s

Showing the Nodes on a Curve, 587

Showing Surfaces, 588 ❑ Showing Surface Attributes, 588 ❑ Showing Surface Area Range, 589 ❑ Showing the Nodes on a Surface, 590 ❑ Showing Surface Normals, 591 Showing Solids, 593 ❑ Showing Solid Attributes, 593 Showing Coordinate Frames, 594 ❑ Showing Coordinate Frame Attributes, 594 Showing Planes, 595 ❑ Showing Plane Attributes, 595 ❑ Showing Plane Angle, 596 ❑ Showing Plane Distance, 598 Showing Vectors, 599 ❑ Showing Vector Attributes, 599

s

s

s

s

8

Transform Actions

s s

Overview of the Transform Methods, 602 Transforming Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605 ❑ Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 605 ❑ Rotating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 619 ❑ Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors, 629 ❑ Mirroring Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 640 ❑ Moving Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors by Coordinate Frame Reference (MCoord Method), 648 ❑ Pivoting Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 656 ❑ Positioning Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors, 665 ❑ Vector Summing (VSum) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 674 ❑ Moving and Scaling (MScale) Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids, 683 Transforming Coordinate Frames, 690 ❑ Translating Coordinate Frames, 690 ❑ Rotating Coordinate Frames, 693

s

9

Verify Actions

s

Verify Action, 698 ❑ Verifying Surface Boundaries, 698 ❑ Verifying Surfaces for B-reps, 700 - Update Graphics Subordinate Form, 701

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents xi

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

❑

Verify - Surface (Duplicates), 702

10

Associate Actions

s

Overview of the Associate Action, 704 ❑ Associating Point Object, 705 ❑ Associating Curve Object, 707

11

Disassociate Actions

s

Overview of the Disassociate Action Methods, 710 ❑ Disassociating Points, 711 ❑ Disassociating Curves, 712 ❑ Disassociating Surfaces, 713

12

The Renumber Action... Renumbering Geo metry INDEX

s s

Introduction, 716 Renumber Forms, 717 ❑ Renumber Geometry, 718 MSC.Patran Reference Manual, 719 Part 2: Geometry Modeling

s

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Contents xii

Options

Close

C O N T E N T S

MSC.Patran Reference Manual Part 2: Geometry Modeling

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §

1

Options

Close

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

Return

1

Introduction to Geometry Modeling

s Overview of Capabilities s Concepts and Definitions s Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran s Building An Optimal Geometry Model

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.1

2

Options

Close

1.1

Overview of Capabilities

A powerful and important feature of MSC.Patran is its geometry capabilities. Geometry can be:

• Created. • Directly accessed from an external CAD part file. • Imported from an IGES file or a PATRAN 2 Neutral file.

Complete Accuracy of Original Geometry. MSC.Patran maintains complete accuracy of the original geometry, regardless of where it came from. The exact mathematical representation of the geometry (e.g., Arc, Rational B-Spline, B-rep, Parametric Cubic, etc.) is consistently maintained throughout the modeling process, without any approximations or conversions. This means different versions of the geometry model are avoided. Only one copy of the geometry design needs to be maintained by the engineer, whether the geometry is in a separate CAD part file or IGES file or the geometry is part of the MSC.Patran database. Below are highlights of the geometry capabilities: Direct Application of Loads/BCs and Element Properties to Geometry. All loads, boundary conditions (BC) and element property assignments can be applied directly to the geometry. When the geometry is meshed with a set of nodes and elements, MSC.Patran will automatically assign the loads/BC or element property to the appropriate nodes or elements. Although you can apply the loads/BCs or element properties directly to the finite element mesh, the advantage of applying them to the geometry is if you remesh the geometry, they remain associated with the model. Once a new mesh is created, the loads/BC and element properties are automatically reassigned. For more information, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Direct Geometry Access. Direct Geometry Access (DGA) is the capability to directly access (or read) geometry information from an external CAD user file, without the use of an intermediate translator. Currently, DGA supports the following CAD systems:

• EDS/Unigraphics • Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology • CATIA by Dassault Systemes • EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision • CADDS 5 by Computervision

With DGA, the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD user file can be accessed. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads/BC and the element properties directly to the geometry. For more detailed information on DGA, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry (p. 47). Import and Export of Geometry. There are three file formats available to import or export geometry:

• IGES

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.1

3

Options

Close

**• PATRAN 2 Neutral File • Express Neutral File
**

In using any of the file formats, MSC.Patran maintains the original mathematical form of the geometry. (That is, the geometry is not approximated into the parametric cubic form.) This means the accuracy of the geometry in all three files is maintained. For more information on the import and export capabilities for IGES, PATRAN 2 Neutral File, and the Express Neutral File, see Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry (Ch. 2). MSC.Patran Native Geometry. You can also create geometry in MSC.Patran (“native” geometry). A large number of methods are available to create, translate, and edit geometry, as well as methods to verify, delete and show information. MSC.Patran’s native geometry consists of:

**• Points • Parametric curves • Bi-parametric surfaces • Tri-parametric solids • Boundary represented (B-rep) solids
**

All native geometry is fully parameterized both on the outer boundaries and within the interior (except for B-rep solids which are parameterized only on the outer surfaces). Fully parameterized geometry means that you can apply varying loads or element properties directly to the geometric entity. MSC.Patran evaluates the variation at all exterior and interior locations on the geometric entity.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

4

Options

Close

1.2

**Concepts and Definitions
**

There are many functions in MSC.Patran that rely on the mathematical representation of the geometry. These functions are:

• Applying a pressure load to a curve, surface or solid. • Creating a field function in parametric space. • Meshing a curve, surface or solid. • Referencing a vertex, edge or face of a curve, surface or solid.

For every curve, surface or solid in a user database, information is stored on its Parameterization, Topology and Connectivity which is used in various MSC.Patran functions. The concepts of parameterization, connectivity and topology are easy to understand and they are important to know when building a geometry and an analysis model. The following sections will describe each of these concepts and how you can build an optimal geometry model for analysis.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

5

Options

Close

Parameterization

All MSC.Patran geometry are labeled one of the following:

**• Point (0-Dimensions) • Curve (1-Dimension) • Surface (2-Dimensions) • Solid (3-Dimensions)
**

Depending on the order of the entity - whether it is a one-dimensional curve, a two-dimensional surface, or a three-dimensional solid - there is one, two or three parameters labeled ξ 1 , ξ 2 , ξ 3 that are associated with the entity. This concept is called “parameterization”. Parameterization means the X,Y,Z coordinates of a curve, surface or solid are represented as functions of variables or parameters. Depending on the dimension of the entity, the X,Y,Z locations are functions of the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 . An analogy to the parameterization of geometry is describing an X , Y location as a function of time, t t. If X = X ( t ) and Y = Y ( t ) , as t changes, X and Y will define a path. Parameterization of geometry does the same thing - as the parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 change, it defines various points on the curve, surface and solid. The following describes how a point, curve, surface and solid are parameterized in MSC.Patran. Point. A Point in MSC.Patran is a point coordinate location in three-dimensional global XYZ space. Since a point has zero-dimensions, it has no associated parameters, therefore, it is not parameterized.

z

P

(X,Y,Z) y

x

Figure 1-1 Point in MSC.Patran Curve. A Curve in MSC.Patran is a one-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A curve can also be described as a particle moving along a defined path in space. Another way of defining a curve is, a curve is a mapping function, Φ ( ξ1 ) , from one-dimensional parametric space into three-dimensional global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-3.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

6

Options

Close

A curve has one parametric variable, ξ 1 , which is used to describe the location of any given point, P , along a curve, as shown in Figure 1-2.

P ξ1

z V1

V2

x

y Figure 1-2 Curve in MSC.Patran

The parameter, ξ 1 , has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , where at ξ 1 = 0 , P is at endpoint V1 and at ξ 1 = 1 , P is at endpoint V2 . A straight curve can be defined as: P = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 )V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-1

Φ(ξ1)

V2 z 0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 x y V1

0

ξ1

1

ξ1

Figure 1-3 Mapping Function Phi for a Curve Eq. 1-1 of our straight curve can be represented as: Φξ 1 = ( 1.0 – ξ 1 ) V1 + ξ 1 V2 Eq. 1-2

The derivative of Φ ( ξ1 ) in Eq. 1-2, would give us Eq. 1-3 which is the tangent of the straight curve. ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = V2 – V1 Eq. 1-3

Because the curve is straight, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 is a constant value. The tangent, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 , also defines a vector for the curve, which is the positive direction of ξ 1 .

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

7

Options

Close

For any given curve, the tangent and positive direction of ξ 1 at any point along the curve can be found. (The vector, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 , usually will not have a length of one.) Surface. A surface in MSC.Patran is a two-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A surface has two parameters, ξ 1 and ξ 2 , where at any given point, P , on the surface, P can be located by ξ 1 and ξ 2 , as shown in Figure 1-4.

V2

ξ2

V1

P ξ1

V3

z

x

y

V4

Figure 1-4 Surface in MSC.Patran A surface generally has three or four edges. Trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges. For more information, see Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20). Similar to a curve, ξ 1 and ξ 2 for a surface have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Thus, at ξ 1 = 0 , ξ 2 = 0 , P is at V1 and at ξ 1 = 1 , ξ 2 = 1 , P is at V3 . A surface is represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ1 ,ξ 2 ) , which maps the parametric space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-5.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2)

(0,1) (1,1) V2

ξ2

(0,0)

ξ2 ξ1

(1,0) V1

z

ξ1

V4

V3

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1

x

y

Figure 1-5 Mapping Function Phi for a Surface The first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ) results in two partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ2 :

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

8

Options

Close Eq. 1-4

∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2

where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction and T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2 direction. At any point for a given surface, T ξ1 and T ξ2 which define the tangents and the positive ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions can be determined. Usually T ξ1 and T ξ2 are not orthonormal, which means they do not have a length of one and they are not perpendicular to each other. Solid. A solid in MSC.Patran is a three-dimensional point set in three-dimensional global XYZ space. A solid has three parameters, can be located by ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , where at any given point, P , within the solid, P ξ 3 , as shown in Figure 1-6.

Note: The above definition applies to tri-parametric solids only. MSC.Patran can also create or import a B-rep solid, which is parameterized on the outer surface only, and not within the interior. See B-rep Solid (p. 24) for more information.

V6

V5

ξ3 ξ2

z

V1

V2

P

V7

ξ1

x y

V4

V3

Figure 1-6 Solid in MSC.Patran A solid generally has five or six sides or faces. (A B-rep solid can have more than six faces.) The parameters ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 have ranges of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . At (0,0,0) P is at V1 and at (1,1,1), P is at V7 .

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

9

Options

Close

A solid can be represented by a mapping function, Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , which maps the parametric space into the global XYZ space, as shown in Figure 1-7.

Φ(ξ1,ξ2,ξ3)

(0,1,1) (0,0,1) (1,1,1) V5 V6

ξ3

ξ2 ξ1

(1,0,1)

ξ3

(1,1,0)

V7

ξ2

V1

(0,0,0)

(1,0,0)

ξ1

V4

V3

0 ≤ ξ1 ≤ 1 0 ≤ ξ2 ≤ 1 0 ≤ ξ3 ≤ 1 x

z

y

Figure 1-7 Mapping Function Phi for a Solid If we take the first order derivatives of Φ ( ξ 1 ,ξ 2 ,ξ 3 ) , we get three partial derivatives, ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 and ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ3 , shown in Eq. 1-5: ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 1 = T ξ1 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 2 = T ξ2 , ∂Φ ⁄ ∂ξ 3 = T ξ3 Eq. 1-5

Where T ξ1 is the tangent vector in the ξ 1 direction, T ξ2 is the tangent vector in the ξ 2 direction, and T ξ3 is the tangent vector in the ξ 3 direction. At any point within a given solid, T ξ1 , T ξ2 and T ξ3 , which define the tangents and positive ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 directions can be determined.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

10

Options

Close

Topology

Topology identifies the kinds of items used to define adjacency relationships between geometric entities. Every curve, surface and solid in MSC.Patran has a defined set of topologic entities. You can reference these entities when you build the geometry or analysis model. Examples of this include:

• Creating a surface between edges of two surfaces. • Meshing an edge or a face of a solid. • Referencing a vertex of a curve, surface or solid to apply a loads/BC.

Topology is invariant through a one-to-one bicontinuous mapping transformation. This means you can have two curves, surfaces or solids that have different parameterizations, but topologically, they can be identical. To illustrate this concept, Figure 1-8 shows three groups of surfaces A-D. Geometrically, they are different, but topologically they are the same.

A B C D D* A*

A B C D

C B

* Surface A is not connected to Surface D

Figure 1-8 Topologically Equivalent Surfaces Topologic Entities: Vertex, Edge, Face, Body. The types of topologic entities found in MSC.Patran are the following: Vertex Edge Defines the topologic endpoint of a curve, or a corner of a surface or a solid. A vertex is separate from a geometric point, although a point can exist on a vertex. Defines the topologic curve on a surface or a solid. An edge is separate from a geometric curve, although a curve can exist on an edge.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

11

Options

Close

Face Body

Defines the topologic surface of a solid. A face is separate from a geometric surface, although a surface can exist on a face. A group of surfaces that forms a closed volume. A body is usually referenced as a Brep solid or a Volume solid, where only its exterior surfaces are parameterized. See Solids (p. 24) for more information.

Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran. The connectivity for a curve, surface and solid determines the order in which the internal vertex, edge and face IDs will be assigned. The location of a geometric entity’s parametric axes defines the point where assignment of the IDs for the entity’s vertices, edges and faces will begin. Important: Generally, when modeling in MSC.Patran, you do not need to know the topologic entities’ internal IDs. When you cursor select a topologic entity, such as an edge of a surface, the ID will be displayed in the appropriate listbox on the form. Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10 show a four sided surface and a six sided solid with the internal vertex, edge and face IDs displayed. If the connectivity changes, then the IDs of the vertices, edges and faces will also change.

V7 V2 ED2 V3 ED11 F6 V6 ED1 F4 ED5 V3 F2 ED8

ED7 V8

ED6

100

ED12

11

ED3 ED10 ED2 F1 F5 V2

ED3 F3 V5 ED9

ξ2

V1 ED4 V4

V4

ξ3

ED4

ξ1

Figure 1-9 Vertex & Edge Numbering for a Surface

ED1

ξ2

V1

ξ1

Figure 1-10 Face Numbering for a Solid

**For example, in Figure 1-9, the edge, ED3, of Surface 11 would be displayed as:
**

Surface 11.3

**The vertex, V4, in Figure 1-9 would be displayed as:
**

Surface 11.3.1

V4 has a vertex ID of 1 that belongs to edge 3 on surface 11. The face, F1, of Solid 100 in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:

Solid 100.1

**The edge, ED10, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
**

Solid 100.1.3

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

12

Options

Close

**ED10 has an edge ID of 3 that belongs to face 1 on solid 100. The vertex, V6, in Figure 1-10 would be displayed as:
**

Solid 100.1.2.2

V6 has a vertex ID of 2 that belongs to edge 2 on face 1 on solid 100.

**Topological Congruency and Meshing
**

When meshing adjacent surfaces or solids, MSC.Patran requires the geometry be topologically congruent so that coincident nodes will be created along the common boundaries. Figure 1-11 shows an example where surfaces 1 through 3 are topologically incongruent and surfaces 2 through 5 are topologically congruent. The outer vertices are shared for surfaces 1 through 3, but the inside edges are not. Surfaces 2 through 5 all have common edges, as well as common vertices. There are several ways to correct surfaces 1 through 3 to make them congruent. See Building a Congruent Model (p. 31) for more information.

2 1 3

4

2

5

3

Topologically Incongruent

Topologically Congruent

Figure 1-11 Topologically Incongruent and Congruent Surfaces For a group of surfaces or solids to be congruent, the adjacent surfaces or solids must share common edges, as well as common vertices. (MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran software product required adjacent surfaces or solids to share only the common vertices to be considered topologically congruent for meshing.)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

13

Options

Close

Gaps Between Adjacent Surfaces. Another type of topological incongruence is shown in Figure 1-12. It shows a gap between two pairs of surfaces that is greater than the Global Model Tolerance. This means when you mesh the surface pairs, coincident nodes will not be created along both sides of the gap.

Incongruent Surfaces

Gap > Global Model Tolerance

Vertices are Shared, Edges are Not

Figure 1-12 Topologically Incongruent Surfaces with a Gap MSC recommends two methods for closing surface gaps:

• Use the Create/Surface/Match form. See Matching Adjacent Surfaces (p. 270). • Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481).

For more information on meshing, see Introduction to Functional Assignment Tasks (Ch. 1) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Non-manifold Topology. Non-manifold topology can be simply defined as a geometry that is non-manufacturable. However, in analysis, non-manifold topology is sometimes either necessary or desirable. Figure 1-13 shows a surface model with a non-manifold edge.

Figure 1-13 Non-manifold Topology at an Edge

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

14

Options

Close

This case may be perfectly fine. A non-manifold edge has more than two surfaces or solid faces connected to it. Therefore, two solids which share a common face also give non-manifold geometry (both the common face and its edges are non-manifold). In general, non-manifold topology is acceptable in MSC.Patran. The exception is in the creation of a B-rep solid where a non-manifold edge is not allowed. The Verifying Surface Boundaries (p. 698) option detects non-manifold edges as well as free edges.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

15

Options

Close

Connectivity

In Figure 1-2, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-6 in Parameterization (p. 5), the axes for the parameters, ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 , have a unique orientation and location on the curve, surface and solid. Depending on the orientation and location of the ξ 1 , ξ 2 , and ξ 3 axes, this defines a unique connectivity for the curve, surface or solid. For example, although the following two curves are identical, the connectivity is different for each curve (note that the vertex IDs are reversed):

V2

V1

ξ1

V1 V2

ξ1

Figure 1-14 Connectivity Possibilities for a Curve For a four sided surface, there are a total of eight possible connectivity definitions. Two possible connectivities are shown in Figure 1-15. (Again, notice that the vertex and edge IDs are different for each surface.)

V2 ED1 V3 ED2 ED2 V2 ED3

ξ2

V1

ξ1

ED4 ED3 V4

V3 ED1

ξ2

ξ1

ED4 V1

V4

Figure 1-15 Two Possible Connectivities for a Surface

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

16

Options

Close

For a tri-parametric solid with six faces, there are a total of 24 possible connectivity definitions in MSC.Patran - three orientations at each of the eight vertices. Two possible connectivities are shown in Figure 1-16.

V6 V6

V5

V5 V2 V7 V2 V8 V3 V4 V1

ξ3 ξ2

V1

V8

ξ1 ξ2

ξ3

V3

ξ1

V4

Figure 1-16 Two Possible Connectivities for a Solid Plotting the Parametric Axes. MSC.Patran can plot the location and orientation of the parametric axes for the geometric entities by turning on the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form, under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. Modifying the Connectivity. For most geometric entities, you can modify the connectivity by altering the orientation and/or location of the parametric axes by using the Geometry application’s Edit action’s Reverse method. See Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414). For solids, you can also control the location of the parametric origin under the Preferences/Geometry menu and choose either the MSC.Patran Convention button or the PATRAN 2.5 Convention button for the Solid Origin Location.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

17

Options

Close

**Effects of Parameterization, Connectivity and Topology in MSC.Patran
**

The geometry’s parameterization and connectivity affect the geometry and finite element analysis model in the following ways: Defines Order of Internal Topologic IDs. The parameterization and connectivity for a curve, surface or solid define the order of the internal IDs of their topologic entities. MSC.Patran stores these IDs internally and displays them when you cursor select a vertex, edge or face. See Vertex, Edge and Face ID Assignments in MSC.Patran (p. 11) for more information. Defines Positive Surface Normals. Using right hand rule by crossing a surface’s ξ 1 direction with its ξ 2 direction, it defines the surface’s positive normal direction ( ξ 3 direction). This affects many areas of geometry and finite element creation, including creating B-rep solids. See Building An Optimal Geometry Model (p. 30) for more information. Defines Positive Pressure Load Directions. The parameterization and connectivity of a curve, surface or solid define the positive direction for a pressure load, and it defines the surface’s top and bottom locations for an element variable pressure load. See Create Structural LBCs Sets (p. 19) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information. Helps Define Parametric Field Functions. If you reference a field function that was defined in parametric space, when creating a varying loads/BC or a varying element or material property, the loads/BC values or the property values will depend on the geometry’s parameterization and the orientation of the parametric axes. See Fields Forms (p. 140) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments for more information. Defines Node and Element ID Order For IsoMesh. The MSC.Patran mapped mesher, IsoMesh, will use the geometric entity’s parameterization and connectivity to define the order of the node and element IDs and the element connectivity. (The parameterization and connectivity will not be used if the mesh will have a transition or change in the number of elements within the surface or solid.) See IsoMesh (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.2

18

Options

Close

**Global Model Tolerance & Geometry
**

MSC.Patran uses the Global Model Tolerance when it imports or accesses geometry, when it creates geometry, or when it modifies existing geometry. The Global Model Tolerance is found under the Preferences/Global menu. The default value is 0.005. When creating geometry, if two points are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then MSC.Patran will only create the first point and not the second. This rule also applies to curves, surfaces and solids. If the points that describe two curves, surfaces or solids are within a distance of the Global Model Tolerance, then only the first curve, surface or solid will be created, and not the second. Important: For models with dimensions which vary significantly from 10 units, MSC recommends you set the Global Model Tolerance to .05% of the maximum model dimension. For more information on the Global Model Tolerance, see (p. 57) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

19

Options

Close

1.3

**Types of Geometry in MSC.Patran
**

Generally, there are four types of geometry objects in MSC.Patran:1

• Point (default color is cyan) • Parametric Curve (default color is yellow) • Bi-Parametric Surface (default color is green) • Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue)

MSC.Patran also can access, import, and create Trimmed Surfaces, B-rep Solids and Volume Solids. See Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) and Solids (p. 24) for more information. You also can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces and solids, which are recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file. See Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) for more information. For more information on the types of geometry that can be created, see Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27).

1

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

20

Options

Close

Trimmed Surfaces

Trimmed surfaces are a special class of bi-parametric surfaces. Trimmed surfaces can be accessed from an external CAD user file; they can be imported from an IGES or Express Neutral file; and they can be created in MSC.Patran. Unlike other types of bi-parametric surfaces, trimmed surfaces can have more than four edges, and they can have one or more interior holes or cutouts. Also, trimmed surfaces have an associated parent surface that is not displayed. A trimmed surface is defined by identifying the closed active and inactive regions of the parent surface. This parent surface defines the parameterization and curvature of the trimmed surface. You can create three types of trimmed surfaces in MSC.Patran:1

• General Trimmed Surface (default color is magenta) • Simply Trimmed Surface (default color is green) • Composite Trimmed Surface (default is magenta) • Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface (default color is green)

(Green is the default color for both a simply trimmed surface and a general, bi-parametric surface.) Important: Simply trimmed surfaces and ordinary composite trimmed surfaces can be meshed with IsoMesh or Paver. General trimmed surfaces and composite trimmed surfaces can only be meshed with Paver. See Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information. Also note that some geometric operations are not currently possible with a general trimmed surface, e.g., a general trimmed surface can not be used to create a triparametric solid. General Trimmed Surface. A general trimmed surface can have any number of outer edges and any number of inner edges which describe holes or cutouts. These outer and inner edges are defined by a closed loop of chained curves. (Chained curves can be created with the Create/Curve/Chain form. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131).) An example is shown in Figure 1-17. All general trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default color of magenta.2

1

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu. 2 The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

21

Options

Close

Inner Edges or Holes

Outer Surface Edges

Figure 1-17 General Trimmed Surface Simply Trimmed Surface. A simply trimmed surface can only have four outer edges. It cannot have any inner edges, or holes or cutouts. A simply trimmed surface reparametrizes the bounded region of the parent and is called an overparametrization. An example is shown in Figure 1-18. (A simply trimmed surface can have three sides, with one of the four edges degenerating to a zero length edge.) Like a general trimmed surface, a simply trimmed surface’s outer edges are defined by a closed loop of chained curves. See Creating Chained Curves (p. 131). All simply trimmed surfaces, whether they are accessed, imported or created, have a default color of green. 1

1

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

22

Options

Close

Four Outer Edges

Underlying Invisible Parent Surface

Figure 1-18 Simply Trimmed Surface Sometimes a three of four sided region which define a trimmed surface will be created as a general trimmed surface instead. This occurs when the overparametrization distorts the bounded region of the parent to such an extent that it would be difficult to mesh and use for analysis. Composite Trimmed Surface. The composite trimmed surface is a kind of supervisor surface that allows a collection of surfaces to be considered as one surface defined within a specific boundary. This surface can also have holes in it. Evaluations on the composite trimmed surface is similar to evaluations on the MSC.Patran trim surface (General Trimmed Surface). The big difference is that it is three to five times slower than ordinary surfaces. The composite trimmed surface should be considered a tool. Once the surface is built, it is a single entity, yet processes on multiple surfaces, relieving the applications of the task of determining where and when to move from one surface to another. APPLICATION: The composite trimmed surface supervisor is a bounded PLANAR trim surface. It acquires its name from the type of service it performs. Let us, for a moment, consider the composite trimmed surface to be a cloud in the sky. The sun, being the light source behind the cloud, creating a shadow on planet earth only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true with the composite trimmed surface, except a view vector is given to determine the light direction. “Under Surfaces” replace planet earth. The valid region on the “Under Surfaces” is defined by where the outline of the composite trimmed surface appears.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

23

Options

Close

STEPS_BUILDING: There are three basic steps in building a composite trimmed surface. Step 1 Step 2 Creating the outer perimeter curve. In most cases this is a MSC.Patran curve chain entity. Selecting an acceptable view direction for the view vector and planar Composite trimmed surface entity. The view vector is the most important aspect of building a composite trimmed surface. The resulting view vector must yield only one intersection solution at any position on the “Under Surfaces”. The user must select the proper view for the location of the composite trimmed surface with some forethought and eliminate the possibility of any of the underlying surfaces wrapping around in back of one another. In some cases this may not be possible! The user must then create more than one composite trimmed surface. Additionally, since the composite trimmed surface supervisor is PLANAR, it cannot encompass more than a 180 degree field of view. An example of this would be a cylindrically shaped group of surfaces. It would probably take three properly placed composite trimmed surface to represent it; one for every 120 degrees of rotation. Step 3 Determines which currently displayed surfaces will be become part of the composite trimmed surface domain (“Under Surfaces”). The user may individually select the correct underlying surfaces or, if wanting to select all visible surfaces, the user must place into “ERASE” all surfaces which might cause multiple intersections and then select the remaining visible surfaces.

RULES: 1. The composite trimmed surface domain must not encompass any dead space. If any portion has a vacancy (no “Under Surface” under it), unpredictable results will occur.

2. Processing along the view vector must yield a single intersection solution at any position on the underlying surfaces within the composite trimmed surface’s domain. Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface. The only difference between an Ordinary Composite Trimmed Surface and the Composite Trimmed Surface is that this type will have only four edges comprising the outer loop and no inner loops.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

24

Options

Close

Solids

There are three types of solids that can be accessed or imported, or created in MSC.Patran:1

• Tri-Parametric Solid (default color is dark blue) • B-rep Solid (default color is white) • Volume Solid (default color is pink or light red)

on (p. 2) lists the types of solids created with each Geometry Application method. Tri-Parametric Solid. All solids in MSC.Patran, except for B-rep solids and volume solids, are tri-parametric solids. Tri-parametric solids are parameterized on the surface, as well as inside the solid. Tri-parametric solids can only have four to six faces with no interior voids or holes. Tri-parametric solids can be meshed with IsoMesh or TetMesh. Important: IsoMesh will create hexagonal elements if the solid has five or six faces, but some wedge elements will be created for the five faced solid. IsoMesh will create a tetrahedron mesh for a four faced solid. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling. B-rep Solid. A B-rep solid is formed from a group of topologically congruent surfaces that define a completely closed volume. Only its outer surfaces or faces are parameterized and not the interior. An example is shown in Figure 1-19. The group of surfaces that define the B-rep solid are its shell. A B-rep shell defines the exterior of the solid, as well as any interior voids or holes. Shells can be composed of bi-parametric surfaces and/or trimmed surfaces. B-rep solids can be created with the Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) on using the form.

Figure 1-19 B-rep Solid in MSC.Patran B-rep solids are meshed with TetMesh. See Meshing Solids (p. 17) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling for more information.

1

The default colors are used if the Display Method is set to Entity Type, instead of Group, on the Graphics Preferences form under the Preferences/Graphics menu.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

25

Options

Close

**Parametric Cubic Geometry
**

Parametric cubic geometry is a special class of parameterized geometry. Parametric cubic geometry is supported in MSC.Patran by the PATRAN 2 neutral file and the IGES file for import and export. You have the option to create parametric cubic curves, bi-parametric cubic surfaces and triparametric cubic solids, by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button found on most Geometry application forms. Important: Unless you intend to export the geometry using the PATRAN 2 neutral file, in most situations, you do not need to press the PATRAN 2 Convention button to create parametric cubic geometry. Parametric cubic geometry can also be created in MSC.Patran, which are referred to as “grids”, “lines”, “patches” and “hyperpatches.” Parametric cubic geometry is defined by a parametric cubic equation. For example, a parametric cubic curve is represented by the following cubic equation: Z ( ξ1 ) = S 1 ξ1 + S 2 ξ1 + S3 ξ1 + S4

3 2

Eq. 1-6

where Z ( ξ 1 ) represents the general coordinate of the global coordinates X,Y, and Z; S1 , S2 , S3 , and S 4 are arbitrary constants; and ξ 1 is a parameter in the range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . For more information on parametric cubic geometry, see MSC.Patran Reference Manual.

**Limitations on Parametric Cubic Geometry
**

There are some limitations on parametric cubic geometry. Limits on Types of Curvature. There are limits to the types of curvature or shapes that are allowed for a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid (see Figure 1-20). Eq. 1-7 and Eq. 1-8 below represent the first and second derivatives of Eq. 1-6: Z′ ( ξ 1 ) = 3S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2 ξ 1 + S 3 Z″ ( ξ 1 ) = 6S 1 ξ 1 + 2S 2

2

Eq. 1-7 Eq. 1-8

Eq. 1-7 shows that a parametric cubic curve can only have two points with zero slope and Eq. 18 shows that it can only have one point of inflection, as shown in Figure 1-20.

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

Figure 1-20 Limitations of the Parametric Cubic Curvature

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

26

Options

Close

Limits on Accuracy of Subtended Arcs. When you subtend an arc using a parametric cubic curve, surface or solid, the difference between the true arc radius and the arc radius calculated by the parametric cubic equation will increase. That is, as the angle of a subtended arc for a parametric cubic entity increases, the accuracy of the entity from the true representation of the arc decreases. Figure 1-21 shows that as the subtended angle of a parametric cubic entity increases, the percent error also increases substantially beyond 75 degrees. When creating arcs with parametric cubic geometry, MSC recommends using Figure 1-21 to determine the maximum arc length and its percent error that is acceptable to you. For example, if you create an arc length of 90 degrees, it will have an error of 0.0275% from the true arc length. For most geometry models, MSC recommends arc lengths represented by parametric cubic geometry should be 90 degrees or less. For a more accurate model, the parametric cubic arc lengths should be 30 degrees or less. Percent Error = 100*(Computed Radius - Actual Arc Radius) / Actual Radius 3.0 Percent Error in the Radius (x 10-2) 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 Total Subtended Angle in Degrees Figure 1-21 Maximum Percent Error for Parametric Cubic Arc

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

27

Options

Close

**Matrix of Geometry Types Created
**

All Geometry Application forms use the following Object menu terms:

**• Point • Curve • Surface • Solid • Plane • Vector • Coordinate Frame
**

MSC.Patran will create a specific geometric type of the parametric curve, bi-parametric surface and tri-parametric solid based on the method used for the Create action or Edit action. Table 1-1, and list the types of geometry created for each Create or Edit action method. The tables also list if each method can create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids by pressing the PATRAN 2 Convention button on the application form. (Parametric cubic geometry is recognized by the PATRAN 2 neutral file for export.) For more information on each Create or Edit action method, see Overview of Geometry Create Action (p. 70) and/or Overview of the Edit Action Methods (p. 414). Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic) Not Applicable Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes N/A N/A Yes N/A N/A N/A Yes N/A

Create or Edit Method XYZ Arc3Point 2D Arc2Point 2D Arc3Point 2D Circle Conic Extract Fillet Fit Intersect Involute Normal 2D Normal 2D ArcAngles Point

Type of Curve Parametric Cubic Arc Arc Arc Circle Parametric Cubic Curve On Surface Parametric Cubic Parametric Cubic PieceWise Cubic Polynomial Parametric Cubic Parametric Cubic Parametric Cubic Arc Parametric Cubic

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

28

Options

Close

Table 1-1 Types of Curves Created in MSC.Patran (continued) PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic) Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A No Yes

Create or Edit Method Project PWL Revolve Spline, Loft Spline option Spline, B-Spline option Spline, B-Spline option TanCurve TanPoint Chain Manifold

Type of Curve Curve On Surface Parametric Cubic Arc PieceWise Cubic Polynomial PieceWise Rational Polynomial NURB* Parametric Cubic Parametric Cubic Composite Curve Curve On Surface

* NURB splines are created if the NURBS Accelerator toggle is pressed OFF (default is ON) on the Geometry Preferences form, found under the Preferences/Geometry menu. This is true whether you create the spline in MSC.Patran or if you import the spline from an IGES file. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. If the NURBS Accelerator is ON, PieceWise Rational Polynomial splines will be created instead. Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic) Not Applicable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A Yes

Create or Edit Method XYZ Curve Decompose Edge Extract Extrude Fillet Glide Match Normal Revolve

Type of Surface Parametric Bi-Cubic Curve Interpolating Surface Trimmed Surface Generalized Coons Surface Surface On Solid Extruded Surface Parametric Bi-Cubic Parametric Bi-Cubic Parametric Bi-Cubic Sweep Normal Surface Surface of Revolution

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.3

29

Options

Close

Table 1-2 Types of Surfaces Created in MSC.Patran (continued) PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic) No Yes No No No

Create or Edit Method Ruled Vertex Trimmed (Surface Option) Trimmed (Planar Option) Trimmed (Composite Option)

Type of Surface Ruled Surface Curve Interpolating Surface Trimmed Surface Trimmed Surface Composite Trimmed Surface

Table 1-3 Types of Solids Created in MSC.Patran PATRAN 2 Convention? (Parametric Cubic) Not Applicable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A No Yes

Create or Edit Method XYZ Extrude Face Glide Normal Revolve Surface Vertex B-rep Decompose

Type of Solid Parametric Tri-Cubic Extruded Solid Solid 5Face, Solid 6Face Glide Solid Sweep Normal Solid Solid of Revolution Surface Interpolating Solid Parametric Tri-Cubic Ordinary Body Tri-Parametric

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

30

Options

Close

1.4

**Building An Optimal Geometry Model
**

A well defined geometry model simplifies the building of the optimal finite element analysis model. A poorly defined geometry model complicates, or in some situations, makes it impossible to build or complete the analysis model. In computer aided engineering (CAE) analysis, most geometry models do not consist of neatly trimmed, planar surfaces or solids. In some situations, you may need to modify the geometry to build a congruent model, create a set of degenerate surfaces or solids, or decompose a trimmed surface or B-rep solid. The following sections will explain how to:

• Build a congruent model. • Verify and align surface normals. • Build trimmed surfaces. • Decompose trimmed surfaces into three- or four-sided surfaces. • Build a B-rep solid. • Build degenerate surfaces or solids.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

31

Options

Close

**Building a Congruent Model
**

MSC.Patran requires adjacent surfaces or solids be topologically congruent so that the nodes will be coincident at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12) for more information. For example, Figure 1-22 shows surfaces 1, 2 and 3 which are incongruent. When meshing with Isomesh or Paver, MSC.Patran cannot guarantee the nodes will coincide at the edges shared by surfaces 1, 2 and 3.

2 1

3

Figure 1-22 Incongruent Set of Surfaces To make the surfaces in Figure 1-22 congruent, you can:

• Use the Edit/Surface/Edge Match form with the Surface-Point option. See Matching

Surface Edges (p. 481) on using the form.

**• Or, break surface 1 with the Edit/Surface/Break form. See Surface Break Options
**

(p. 457) on using the form. The following describes the method of using the Edit/Surface/Break form. To make surfaces 1 through 3 congruent, we will break surface 1 into surfaces 4 and 5, as shown in Figure 1-23:

4

2

5 3

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

32

Options Figure 1-23 Congruent Set of Surfaces

Close

The entries for the Edit/Surface/Break form are shown below:

x Geometry

Action: Object: Method: Option: Delete Original Surfaces Surface List: Break Point List Surface 1 Point 10 Edit Surface Break Point

Pressing this button will delete surface 1, after the break. Cursor select or enter the ID for surface 1. Cursor select or enter the ID for point 10, as shown in Figure 1-24.

Since Auto Execute is ON, we do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Cursor select Surface 1 for the Surface List on the form.

2 1

10

Cursor select Point 10 for the Point List on the form.

3

Figure 1-24 Cursor Locations for Surface Break

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

33

Options

Close

**Building Optimal Surfaces
**

Building optimal surfaces will save time and it will result in a better idealized finite element analysis model of the design or mechanical part. Optimal surfaces consist of a good overall shape with no sharp corners, and whose normal is aligned in the same direction with the other surfaces in the model. Avoid ing Sharp Corners. In general, MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) recommends that you avoid sharp inside corners when creating surfaces. That is, you should generally try to keep the inside corners of the surfaces to 45 degrees or more. The reason is that when you mesh surfaces with quadrilateral elements, the shapes of the elements are determined by the overall shape of the surface, see Figure 1-25. The more skewed the quadrilateral elements are, the less reasonable your analysis results might be. Note: You can use the surface display lines to predict what the surface element shapes will look like before meshing. You can increase or decrease the number of display lines under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. For further recommendations, please consult the vendor documentation for your finite element analysis code.

1 2 4 3

Surfaces With Sharp Corners

1

4 3

2

Optimal Surface Shapes

Figure 1-25 Surfaces With and Without Sharp Corners

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

34

Options

Close

Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals Using Edit/Surface/Reverse. MSC.Patran can determine the positive normal direction for each surface by using right hand rule and crossing the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes of a surface. Depending on the surface’s connectivity, each surface could have different normal directions, as shown in Figure 1-26.

ξ1 ξ2

ξ2 ξ1

Figure 1-26 Opposing Normals for Two Surfaces Important: In general, you should try to maintain the same normal direction for all surfaces in a model. The normal direction of a surface affects finite element applications, such defining the positive pressure load direction, the top and bottom surface locations for a variable pressure load, and the element connectivity. Use the Edit/Surface/Reverse form to display the surface normal vectors, and to reverse or align the normals for a group of surfaces. See Reversing Surfaces (p. 501) on using the form.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

35

Options

Close

Example of Verifying and Aligning Surface Normals. For example, Figure 1-27 shows a group of eight surfaces that we want to display the normal vectors, and if necessary, reverse or align the normals. To display the surface normals without reversing, do the following:

x Geometry

Action: Object: Method: Surface List Draw Normal Vectors Edit Surface Reverse Surface 1:8

Make sure you turn Auto Execute OFF before cursor selecting surfaces 1-8. And do not press Apply. Apply will reverse the normals.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Figure 1-27 Group of Surfaces to Verify Normals You should see red arrows drawn on each surface which represent the surface normal vectors, as shown in Figure 1-28.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Figure 1-28 Surface Normal Vectors

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

36

Options

Close

Align the normals by reversing the normals for surfaces 1 through 4: Surface List -ApplyDraw Normal Vectors

This will plot the updated normal vector directions.

Surface 1:4

Figure 1-29 shows the updated normal directions which are now aligned.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Figure 1-29 Aligned Surface Normal Vectors

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

37

Options

Close

**Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces
**

Trimmed surfaces are preferred for modeling a complex part with many sides. However, there may be areas in your model where you may want to decompose, or break, a trimmed surface into a series of three or four sided surfaces. One reason is that you want to mesh the surface area with IsoMesh instead of Paver. (IsoMesh can only mesh surfaces that have three or four edges.) Another reason is that you want to create tri-parametric solids from the decomposed three or four sided surfaces and mesh with IsoMesh. To decompose a trimmed surface, use the Geometry application’s Create/Surface/Decompose form. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 255) on using the form. When entered in the Create/Surface/Decompose form, the select menu that appears at the bottom of the screen will show the following icons: Point/Vertex/Edge Point/Interior Point. This will select a point for decomposing in the order listed. If not point or vertex is found, the point closest to edge will be used or a point will be projected onto the surface. Use cursor select or directly input an existing point on the surface. If point is not on the surface, it will be projected onto the surface. Use to cursor select a point location on an edge of a trimmed surface. Use to cursor select a point location inside a trimmed surface. Use to cursor select a vertex of a trimmed surface. Example. Figure 1-30 shows trimmed surface 4 with seven edges. We will decompose surface 4 into four four-sided surfaces.

20 21 26 3

24

25 22

23

Figure 1-30 Trimmed Surface to be Decomposed

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

38

Options

Close

Our first decomposed surface will be surface 3, as shown in Figure 1-31. The figure shows surface 3 cursor defined by three vertex locations and one point location along an edge. The point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

4

Use Use to cursor select these three vertices. to cursor select this point location along the edge.

Figure 1-31 Point Locations for Decomposed Surface 4 Figure 1-32 shows the remaining decomposed surfaces 5, 6 and 7 and the select menu icons used to cursor define the surfaces. Again, the point locations can be selected in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

4

Use Use to cursor select these three vertices for Surface 5. to cursor select this point along the edge for Surface 5.

5

7 6

Use to cursor select these four vertices for Surface 7. Use to cursor select this point along the edge for Surface 6.

Use to cursor select these three vertices for Surface 6.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

39

Options

Close

Figure 1-32 Point Locations for Decomposed Surfaces 5, 6 and 7 Use Surface Display Lines as a Guide. Generally, the surface display lines are a good guide to where the trimmed surface can be decomposed. MSC recommends increasing the display lines to four or more. The display lines are controlled under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. See Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

40

Options

Close

**Building B-rep Solids
**

Boundary represented (B-rep) solids are created by using the Geometry application’s Create/Solid/B-rep form. See Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid (p. 338) for more information on the form. There are three rules to follow when you create a B-rep solid in MSC.Patran: 1. The group of surfaces that will define the B-rep solid must fully enclose a volume. 2. The surfaces must be topologically congruent. That is, the adjacent surfaces must share a common edge. 3. The normal surface directions for the exterior shell must all point outward, as shown in Figure 1-33. That is, the normals must point away from the material of the body. This will be done automatically during creation as long as rules 1 and 26 are satisfied. B-rep solids created in MSC.Patran can only be meshed with TetMesh. Important: At this time, MSC.Patran can only create a B-rep solid with an exterior shell, and no interior shells.

8

9

4 3

7 1 6

10

2 Y X Z 1

5

Figure 1-33 Surface Normals for B-rep Solid

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

41

Options

Close

**Building Degenerate Surfaces and Solids
**

A bi-parametric surface can degenerate from four edges to three edges. A tri-parametric solid can degenerate from six faces to four or five faces (a tetrahedron or a wedge, respectively). The following describes the best procedures for creating a degenerate triangular surface and a degenerate tetrahedron and a wedge shaped solid. Important: IsoMesh will create hexahedron elements only, if the solid has six faces. Some wedge elements will be created for a solid with five faces. IsoMesh will create tetrahedron elements only, for a solid with four faces. TetMesh will create tetrahedron elements only, for all shaped solids.

Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle). There are two ways you can create a degenerate, three-sided surface:

**• Use the Create/Surface/Edge form with the 3 Edge option. See Creating Surfaces
**

from Edges (Edge Method) (p. 257) on using the form.

**• Or, use the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. See Creating
**

Surfaces Between 2 Curves (p. 240) on using the form. Figure 1-34 illustrates the method of using the Create/Surface/Curve form with the 2 Curve option. Notice that the apex of the surface is defined by a zero length curve by using the Curve select menu icon shown in Figure 1-34.

Cursor select this point twice using this icon: Cursor select this edge or curve for the Starting or Ending Curve List. in the Curve select menu for the Starting or Ending Curve List.

Figure 1-34 Creating a Degenerate Surface Using Create/Surface/Curve Building a Degenerate Solid Four Sided Solid (Tetrahedron). A four sided (tetrahedron) solid can be created by using the Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option, where the starting surface is defined by a point for the apex of the tetrahedron, and the ending surface is an opposing surface or face, as shown in Figure 1-35. Five Sided Solid (Pentahedron). A five sided (pentahedron) solid can be created by using:

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

42

Options

Close

• The Create/ Solid/Face form with the 5 Face option. See Creating Solids from Faces

(p. 343) on using the form.

**• The Create/Solid/Surface form with the 2 Surface option. See Creating Solids from
**

Surfaces (Surface Method) (p. 327) on using the form. Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37 illustrate using the Create/Solid/Surface form to create the pentahedron and a wedge.

For the Starting Surface List, highlight and

in the select menu, and cursor select this point twice for the first edge of the surface. Highlight again,

then, cursor select this same point twice again. Cursor select this surface or face for the Ending Surface List. Figure 1-35 Creating a Tetrahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

For the Starting Surface List, highlight and

in the select menu, and cursor select this point twice for the first edge of the surface. Highlight again,

then, cursor select this same point twice again. Cursor select this surface or face for the Ending Surface List. Figure 1-36 Creating a Pentahedron Using Create/Solid/Surface

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

43

Options

Close

For the Starting Surface List, highlight in the select menu, and cursor select this curve twice.

Cursor select this surface or face for the Ending Surface List. Figure 1-37 Creating a Wedge Using Create/Solid/Surface

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Introduction to Geometry Modeling §1.4

44

Options

Close

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §

45

Options

Close

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

CHAPTER

2

Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry

s Overview s Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry s PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.1

46

Options

Close

2.1

Overview

MSC.Patran can access geometry from an external CAD system user file. Geometry can also be imported (or read) from a PATRAN 2 Neutral file or from an IGES file. MSC.Patran can export (or write) some or all geometry to an external PATRAN 2 Neutral file or IGES file. Geometry can be accessed or imported into the user database either by using the File/Import menus or by using the File/CAD Model Access menus on the MSC.Patran main form. Geometry can be exported from the database using the File/Export menus. For more information on executing the File/Import and File/Export forms, see Importing Models (p. 26) and Export (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. For more information on accessing CAD models, see Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry (p. 47). For more information on import and export support of geometry for the PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57). For more information on which IGES entities are supported by MSC.Patran for importing and exporting, see Supported IGES Entity Types - Import (p. 51) and Supported IGES Entity Types -Export (p. 116) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

47

Options

Close

2.2

**Direct Geometry Access of CAD Geometry
**

MSC.Patran can directly access geometry from an external CAD file for the following CAD systems that are listed in Table 2-1. This unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature allows you to access the CAD geometry and its topology that are contained in the CAD file. Once the geometry is accessed, you can build upon or modify the accessed geometry in MSC.Patran, mesh the geometry, and assign the loads and boundary conditions as well as the element properties directly to the geometry. You can execute a specific MSC.Patran CAD Access module by using the File/Importing Models menus on the main form. See Importing Models (p. 26) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions for more information. For more information on using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER, see Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files (p. 117) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files (p. 127) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Table 2-1 Supported CAD Systems and Their MSC.Patran CAD Access Modules Supported CAD System EDS/Unigraphics Pro/ENGINEER by Parametric Technology CATIA by Dassault Systemes EUCLID 3 by Matra Datavision CADDS 5 by Computervision MSC.Patran CAD Access Module * MSC.Patran Unigraphics MSC.Patran ProENGINEER MSC.Patran CATIA MSC.Patran EUCLID 3 MSC.Patran CADDS 5

* Each MSC.Patran CAD Access module must be licensed before you can access the appropriate external CAD file. You can find out which MSC.Patran products are currently licensed by pressing the MSC.Software Corporation (MSC) icon on the main form, and then pressing the License button on the form that appears.

**Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran Unigraphics
**

If MSC.Patran Unigraphics is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an external EDS/Unigraphics part file. Features of MSC.Patran Unigraphics

**• Unigraphics part file can be accessed in MSC.Patran using one of two methods. The
**

first method is express file based import. The second method is direct parasolid transmit file based import. In both cases, Unigraphics geometry is imported and stored in a MSC.Patran database.

**• MSC.Patran uses the original geometry definitions of the accessed entities, without any
**

approximations. Parasolid evaluators are directly used for entities imported via the direct parasolid method.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

48

Options

Close

**• CAD Access filters are provided that can be selected based on the defined
**

EDS/Unigraphics entity types, levels, and layers.

**• You can automatically create MSC.Patran groups when accessing the geometry based
**

on the defined entity types, levels, or layers. For more information on using MSC.Patran Unigraphics, see Importing Unigraphics Files (p. 127) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Tips For Accessing EDS/Unigraphics Geometry for Express File Based Import 1. When you execute EDS/Unigraphics, make sure the solid to be accessed is topologically congruent with no gaps (see Figure 2-1). For more information, see Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12). Verify that the edges of the solid’s adjacent faces share the same end points or vertices, and that there are no gaps between the faces. 2. You can improve MSC.Patran Unigraphics’ performance by reducing the number of entities to be processed by using the Entity Type filter on the MSC.Patran Import form and unselect or un-highlight all entities of a particular type that you do not want, before you access the part file. For example, you can unselect the entity type, “BoundedPlane”, to eliminate all bounded plane entities. For the direct parasolid import option, the entity type filter can be used for wire body/sheet body/solid body only. 3. Put those entities in EDS/Unigraphics that you want to access into specific layers. Then select to only those layers in the MSC.Patran Import form before importing the part. 4. Make sure the MSC.Patran Global Model Tolerance is reset to an appropriate value if you will be accessing long thin surfaces and solids with small dimensions (default is 0.005). For example, set the tolerance value so that it is smaller than the smallest edge length (greater than 10.0E-6) in the model. This will improve model usability on some models.

Face 1

Gap

Face 1

Zero Gap

Face 2

Face 2

NOT Topologically Valid (lacking congruent edge)

Topologically Valid (with congruent edge)

Figure 2-1 Topologically Congruent Surfaces for MSC.Patran Unigraphics

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

49

Options

Close

Tips For Accessing Parasolid Geometry. This section provides helpful hints and recommendations regarding the usage of MSC.Patran as it pertains to Parasolid integration. Solid Geometry Guidelines Disassembling Solids The Edit/Solid/Disassemble function in the Geometry Application can be used to create simply trimmed surfaces (green 4-sided) with one command. This can be a big timesaver if the B-rep Solid is being disassembled to eventually create tri-parametric solids (blue) for Hex meshing. This command will convert all 4-sided B-rep Solid faces into simply trimmed surfaces (green) which then can be used to construct tri-parametric solids. If difficulties are encountered in breaking a solid: 1. First disassemble the original solid (Edit/Solid/Disassemble). 2. Try to reconstruct a new solid using Create/Solid/B-rep. If this is unsuccessful due to gaps between surfaces, use the Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. If a solid is created, continue with the break operation. 3. If steps (a) and (b) were unsuccessful:

Solids Break

**• Break the trimmed surfaces from the disassembled solid (step (a)).
**

If this operation is slow, refit the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit) before the break operation.

**• Create the additional surfaces in the interior required to enclose
**

the individual solid volumes.

**• Create the new individual solids using Create/Solid/B-rep. If the
**

B-rep can not be created due to surface gaps, use Edit/Surface/Sew and try again. Global Model Tolerance After successful access of Unigraphics geometry via the Parasolid Direct method, the Global Model Tolerance will be set relative to the models geometric characteristics. This tolerance is the recommended tolerance for MSC.Patran applications to use for best results. Group transform for solids is not supported. For information about transforming solids in pre-release format, see (p. 50).

Solids Group Transform

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

50

Options

Close

Meshing Guidelines Hybrid TetMesher Global Edge Lengths Hybrid TetMesher Mesh Control The Hybrid tetmesher only accepts global edge lengths for mesh criteria if attempting to directly mesh a solid. If you encounter difficulties, decrease the global edge length. The Hybrid tetmesher does not write nodes that lie on solid edges into the mesh seed table. This limits the ability of the Hybrid tetmesher to recognize existing meshes. For example, if your requirements are: (1) to match adjacent meshes (i.e., multiple solids); (2) that the mesh be able to recognize a hard curve/point; or (3) to define mesh seed prior to solid meshing, follow these steps:

• Define any desired hard points/curves and mesh seeds. • Surface mesh the geometry using the paver, creating triangular

elements which completely enclose the desired geometric volume.

**• Invoke the Hybrid tetmesher, using the previously created triangular
**

elements as input. Paver If the paver exhibits difficulties meshing some geometry or making congruent meshes:

• Delete any existing mesh on the problematic geometry. • Perform an Edit/Surface/Refit. • Do an Edit/Surface/Edge Match if congruency is an issue. • Mesh again.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

51

Options

Close

PRE-RELEASE CAPABILITY: Solid Geometry Guidelines Solids - Group Transform Group transform for solids is not supported. If a transformed solid is required, consider the following alternatives: (1) Perform the transformation in the native CAD system and then again access the desired geometry in MSC.Patran; (2) Enable an environment variable before executing MSC.Patran. At the system prompt, type: setenv P3_UG_ENTITY_FILTER 1 which allows the transformation of Parasolid solid geometry and perform the transformation. If a solid is successfully constructed, continue as planned. If not, either:

**• Mesh the original solid and transform the resulting finite element
**

mesh, with the limitation being that element properties and loads/boundary conditions will have to be assigned directly to the finite elements; or

**• Try to reconstruct a B-rep solid from the constituent surfaces that
**

result from the transformation, by first using Geometry tools such as Edit/Surface/Sew, Edit/Surface/Edge Match, etc., to reconnect the surfaces and then use Create/Solid/B-rep.

**• Initially access the original geometry (Unigraphics only) using the
**

Express Translation method. If a solid is successfully imported, a transformation of the geometry is supported.

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Surface Congruency Unigraphics does not automatically enforce surface congruency. Typically, CAE applications require congruent meshes; therefore, geometric surfaces must usually be congruent. Accessing geometry through Parasolid simply retrieves the Unigraphics geometry exactly as it is defined; an explicit action must be taken to sew geometric surfaces, otherwise they will not be congruent. It is recommended that models with surfaces be sewn up in Unigraphics prior to access by MSC.Patran. MSC.Patran offers the ability to also invoke the Unigraphics surface sew tool; in fact, this is the default operation when accessing Sheet Bodies. Unigraphics Sew With Verify During Geometry Access “Unigraphics Sew” and “Verify Boundary” toggles are, by default, ON during import. The Verification entails placement of markers at all incongruent surface edges, thus allowing a user to quickly identify whether the Unigraphics Sew was completely (or partially) successful. The markers may be removed using the Broom icon.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

52

Options

Close

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Problem Unigraphics Entities From Import MSC.Patran detects three different types of anomalies during Unigraphics part file import: a) Suspect939 Entities: Sometimes Unigraphics needs to take special actions to convert surfaces from earlier version parts. These surfaces are attributed with “Suspect939.” Although for the most part these surfaces are usable, Unigraphics recommends that these surfaces be replaced. As such, MSC.Patran will not attempt to include these surfaces in the Unigraphics sewing, and we recommend that these surfaces be refitted once imported into MSC.Patran. You will find these surfaces in a group named, <model_name>_UG_SUSPECT. b) Invalid Entities: Before importing the Unigraphics model, MSC.Patran will check each surface and curve entities to ensure consistency and validity. Occasionally, some entities do not pass the checks. These invalid entities will be excluded from both UG sewing and MSC.Patran import. If you see such a message in the invoke window, you should go back to UG to ensure the model is valid. Please reference the next section, Unigraphics Model Checks (p. 52) for steps to do this check. One recommended way is to refit/reconstruct the surface in Unigraphics and then reimport it into MSC.Patran. If UG sewing is turned on for the MSC.Patran import, there is a chance that invalid entities are created by the UG sew. These entities will be brought into MSC.Patran and put into a group named, <model_name>_UG_INVALID. As there is no guarantee that entities in this group will work with any applications, we strongly recommend you first commit/save the MSC.Patran database and then reconstruct these bodies if possible. c) Gap Surfaces: Sometimes surfaces, that are degenerate or are/close to being zero area, appear in the model. These surfaces are called “gap surfaces.” If there are any such gap surfaces, they will be in a group named, <model_name>_GAP_SURFACE. Please inspect the imported model and determine if these gap surfaces should be removed from the model. Unigraphics Model Checks Unigraphics provides geometry evaluation tools which are extremely useful in judging the quality of a model. Here are some geometry/topology checks Unigraphics can perform and provide results with any UG part: (1) In Unigraphics V13.0, “Info” is available at the top menu bar, under Info/Analysis/Examine Geometry. If you use this on surfaces and any are ill-defined, they will be flagged as “suspect”. (2) In Unigraphics V13.0, Info is available at the top menu bar. To run all checks:

• Use Info->Analysis->Examine Geometry... • Choose “Set All Checks”, then “OK”. • Choose “Select All” to check the entire model currently selectable.

NOTE: Default Distance tolerance is 0.001 units and Default Angle tolerance is 0.5 units.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

53

Options

Close

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines MSC.Patran Surface Sew In addition to accessing the Unigraphics surface sew tool, MSC.Patran offers an additional capability to sew surfaces beyond what Unigraphics supports (e.g., resolution of T-edges). If the Unigraphics surface sew does not resolve all incongruences, try using the MSC.Patran surface sew as well. This capability can be accessed through Edit/Surface/Sew in the Geometry application. If both the Unigraphics and MSC.Patran surface sew tools cannot remove all of the gaps and incongruencies, then two options are available. The first option is to refit all of the surfaces (Edit/Surface/Refit). Sometimes, after this operation, these surfaces can be sewn together (Edit/Surface/Sew). The other option for sewing the model using MSC.Patran surface sewing is to increase the global tolerance in MSC.Patran and sew the model again. Changing the global tolerance in MSC.Patran is generally not recommended, but in this case may be necessary. The necessity of increasing the global tolerance is determined by checking the incongruent edges of the model (Verify/Surface/Boundary) to see if they share vertices, or by the gap closure operation when gaps cannot be closed between surface since the edge curves are too far apart. The tolerance value should be set to a value just larger than the distance between the vertices to be equivalenced (vertices which should be shared at the ends of incongruent curves), or just larger than the “allowable gap closure tolerance” which is issued by the sewing (or edge match) operation. (Note that there are cases where sewing will report that gaps exist which are not really gaps. This is because the operation of checking for gaps does not necessarily know about the engineering intent of the model. We suggest that the user check the gaps reported to make sure that they are gaps. Furthermore, we suggest that the global tolerance be increased conservatively, e.g., double the tolerance instead of increasing it by an order of magnitude.) Refitting Geometry The technique of refitting geometry has been identified as a potentially viable method of removing problematic geometry that prevents subsequent meshing, application of LBC’s, editing, transforming, etc. Edit/Curve/Refit and Edit/Surface/Refit are available under the Geometry application. These functions will more regularly parameterize poorly parameterized geometry (for surfaces, this typically involves those with compound curvature), which can currently lead to difficulties in successfully building CAE models. Congruency and boundary definitions are retained.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

54

Options

Close

Surface/Curve Geometry Guidelines Edit/Surface/Refit As previously mentioned, the Edit/Surface/Refit function in the Geometry application can be used to successfully handle problematic Sheet Body geometry. The situations where this applies include:

**• Accessing geometry with the Unigraphics Sew option disabled
**

with subsequent attempts to make the surfaces congruent by using MSC.Patran’s surface sew, edge match, etc.

**• Difficulties rendering, meshing, edge matching, disassembling,
**

transforming, etc.

**• Surfaces that result from disassembling solid geometry (i.e., for
**

regioning). Curves Coincident With Surface and Solid Edges Wire Bodies coincident with Sheet Body and Solid Body edges are not equivalenced. This is a different behavior from what occurs if the “Express Translation” method is used. If coincident curves are not detected by the user, they may, for example, apply a Loads/Boundary Condition to what they believe is a surface or solid edge, when in fact they are applying it to a curve. To avoid this situation:

**• Move all Wire Bodies to a separate group and post only when
**

required.

**• If Wire Bodies are accessed, use the new Geometry function
**

Edit/Point/Equivalence to connect the curve and surface/solid vertices.

• Disable access of Wire Bodies and only access when needed.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

55

Options

Close

**Accessing Geometry Using MSC.Patran ProENGINEER
**

If MSC.Patran ProENGINEER is licensed at your site, you can access the geometric entities from an external Pro/ENGINEER part file. You can execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER either from MSC.Patran or from Pro/ENGINEER by doing one of the following: Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From MSC.Patran. Execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER from MSC.Patran by using the File/Import... menu and make sure the Pro/ENGINEER button is pressed on the Import form. See Importing Pro/ENGINEER Files (p. 117) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions for more information. Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER Important: Make sure MSC.Patran ProENGINEER has been properly installed by following the instructions in Selecting Products (Ch. 3) in the MSC.Patran Installation and Operations Guide. Execute MSC.Patran ProENGINEER from Pro/ENGINEER by doing the following: 1. Execute Pro/ENGINEER by entering: p3_proe

p3_proe will ask for the command name to run Pro/ENGINEER. Press <CR> if you want to accept the default command pro. Enter the command name for running Pro/ENGINEER. [pro]?: <cr>

2. Open the Pro/ENGINEER assembly file or part file. Then, select the Pro/ENGINEER menus in the following order:

File Export Model Patran Geom

**The MSC.Patran menu will list four options:
**

Filter Run MSC.Patran Create .db Create .geo

You can select any one of the above four options. If Filter is selected:

**• A menu appears which allows the user to select:
**

Datum Points Datum Curves Datum Surfaces Datum Planes Coordinate System Datums for output to the intermediated .geo file. (Default = no datum entities).

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.2

56

Options

Close

If Run MSC.Patran is selected:

**• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
**

current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.

**• MSC.Patran will automatically be executed and a database will be created and
**

opened.

**• The MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file containing the
**

Pro/ENGINEER geometry will be loaded into the MSC.Patran database, and both Pro/ENGINEER and MSC.Patran will remain executing. If Create .db is selected:

**• A MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the
**

current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory.

**• A batch job will be submitted in background mode that will:
**

One, execute MSC.Patran and create and open a database. Two, load the.geo file into the MSC.Patran database. And, three, close the database and exit MSC.Patran. If Create .geo is selected, a MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file will be created from the current Pro/ENGINEER object in memory. For more information on the MSC.Patran ProENGINEER intermediate.geo file, see Executing MSC.Patran ProENGINEER From Pro/ENGINEER (p3_proe) (p. 121) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.3

57

Options

Close

2.3

**PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry
**

The PATRAN 2 Neutral file is supported by MSC.Software Corporation’s MSC.Patran. With the PATRAN 2 neutral file, MSC.Patran can import or export only parametric cubic geometry by executing the File/Import menus on the main form. MSC.Patran cannot export non-parametric cubic geometry using the PATRAN 2 Neutral file. Instead, you may use export the entire geometry model using the IGES file. Depending on Geometry application methods used to create the geometry, you may or may not be able to create parametric cubic curves, surfaces or solids. Also, some geometry Create action methods can generate only parametric cubic geometry. For information on how to import or export a PATRAN 2 Neutral file, see Importing PATRAN 2.5 Neutral Files (p. 76) and Exporting a PATRAN 2.5 Neutral File (p. 110) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions. For the definition of parametric cubic geometry, see Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25). For information on what types of curves, surfaces and solids you can create in MSC.Patran, see Table 1-1, and starting on (p. 27). For more information on how to export an IGES file, see Exporting an IGES File (p. 115) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Accessing, Importing & Exporting Geometry §2.3

58

Options

Close

**PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames § 59
**

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

Options

Close

CHAPTER

3

Coordinate Frames

s Coordinate Frame Definitions s Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames s Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.1 60

Options

Close

3.1

**Coordinate Frame Definitions
**

MSC.Patran can create and support three types of coordinate frames:

**• Rectangular (X,Y,Z) • Cylindrical (R, Theta, Z) • Spherical (R, Theta, Phi)
**

MSC.Patran also has a default global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Coord 0 is the default reference coordinate frame for many application forms (which can be changed to another coordinate frame). Also, Coord 0 cannot be deleted, even if specified. Each coordinate system defined in MSC.Patran has three principal axes. These axes define how spatial locations are determined in that coordinate system, and are internally numbered 1, 2 and 3. The meaning of each principal axis depends on if the coordinate frame is rectangular, cylindrical or spherical. When a coordinate frame is created, its principal axes and its orientation are displayed at the appropriate location on the model. The ID of the coordinate frame is also displayed at the coordinate frame’s origin. Important: Coordinate frame angles for the cylindrical and spherical coordinate frames (that is, θ and Φ ) are expressed in degrees. Special conditions apply when defining spatial functions in cylindrical or spherical coordinate frames. For more information, see Procedures for Using Fields (p. 131) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments. Rectangular Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-1 shows the principal axes of a rectangular coordinate frame and a point, P, in rectangular space. In a rectangular frame, the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the X, Y and Z axes, respectively. Points in space specified in a rectangular coordinate frame are entered in the order: x-coordinate, y-coordinate and zcoordinate.

Z Axis 3 P = (X, Y, Z)

Z Axis 2 Y Axis 1 Y X X

Figure 3-1 Rectangular Coordinate Frame

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.1 61

Options

Close

Cylindrical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-2 shows a cylindrical frame in which the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and Z axes, respectively. Points specified in a cylindrical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate and zcoordinate.

Z P = (R,θ, Z)

Axis 3

Z Axis 2 R Axis 1 R T(θ)

θ

Figure 3-2 Cylindrical Coordinate Frame Spherical Coordinate Frame. Figure 3-3 shows a spherical frame in which the principal axes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the R, T ( θ ) and P ( Φ ) axes, respectively. Points specified in a spherical coordinate frame are entered in the order: radial-coordinate, theta-coordinate, and phicoordinate. A node’s local directions (1, 2, 3) can vary according to its position within the spherical coordinate frame. For example: If node lies along R direction, then dir 1 of node is along +R If node lies along R direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P If node lies along R direction, then dir 3 of node is along +T If node lies along T direction, then dir 1 of node is along +T If node lies along T direction, then dir 2 of node is along -P If node lies along T direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R If node lies along P direction, then dir 1 of node is along +P If node lies along P direction, then dir 2 of node is along +T If node lies along P direction, then dir 3 of node is along -R

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.1 62

Options

Close

See Input LBCs Set Data (Static Load Case) (p. 22) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.

P (Φ) Axis 3 P = (R,θ, φ)

θ

R Axis 2 T(θ)

Axis 1 R

φ

Figure 3-3 Spherical Coordinate Frame Definition

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.2 63

Options

Close

3.2

**Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames
**

There are six ways you can create a local rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame in MSC.Patran. They are listed as separate methods under the Geometry Application’s Create action:

**• 3Point • Axis • Euler • Normal • 2Vector • View Vector
**

For more information on using the application forms for the Create methods, see Creating Coordinate Frames (p. 350). You can also create coordinate frames using the Transform action’s Translate and Rotate methods. For more information, see Transforming Coordinate Frames (p. 690). The following sections briefly discuss the Create methods for coordinate frames. 3 Point Method. Figure 3-4 illustrates using the Create action’s 3 Point method for creating a coordinate frame by specifying three points:

3

A point location, using the other two points, that defines a plane formed by axis 1 and 3.

A point location on axis 3.

A point location at the origin.

2 1

Figure 3-4 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the 3 Point Method

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.2 64

Options

Close

Axis Method. Figure 3-5 illustrates using the Axis method to create a coordinate frame by specifying a point location at the origin, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3, and a point location on one of the two remaining axes.

Second, a point location on axis 1, 2, or 3 (you may choose which one).

Third, a point location on one of the two remaining axes (you may choose which one).

First, a point location at the origin.

Figure 3-5

Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Axis Method

Euler Method. The Euler Create action creates a new coordinate frame through three rotations from an existing coordinate frame. Specifically, the following steps are performed in the order shown: 1. Input the reference coordinate frame ID. 2. Enter the point location of the coordinate frame’s origin. 3. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 1. 4. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 2. 5. Enter the axis and rotation angle for Rotation 3. The final orientation of the new coordinate frame depends on the order of rotations that are made.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.2 65

Options

Close

Normal Method. Figure 3-6 illustrates using the Normal method to create a coordinate frame, where its origin is at a point location on a surface. The positive axis 3 direction is normal to the surface by using right-hand rule and crossing the surface’s ξ 1 parametric direction with the ξ 2 direction. The axis 1 direction is along the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the axis 2 direction is orthogonal to axis 1 and 3. For more information on the definition of the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 axes, see Parameterization (p. 5).

Y

X Z

ξ2 ξ1

Figure 3-6 Coordinate Frame Creation Using the Normal Method

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.3 66

Options

Close

3.3

**Translating or Scaling Geometry Using Curvilinear Coordinate Frames
**

You can translate or scale geometry in MSC.Patran by using the Transform action’s Translate method or Scale method. For information and examples on using either form, see Translating Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids, Planes and Vectors (p. 605) or Scaling Points, Curves, Surfaces, Solids and Vectors (p. 629). On either form, you can choose either the Cartesian in Refer. CF toggle or the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle. If Curvilinear in Refer. CF is chosen, you can specify either an existing cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame as the reference, and the translation vector or the scale factors will be interpreted as R, θ , Z for the cylindrical system, and as R, θ , Φ for the spherical system. (Both the θ axis and Φ axis are measured in degrees.) Figure 3-7 throughFigure 3-10 are examples of using the Translate and Scale methods with the Curvilinear in Refer. CF toggle.

7 3 1 4 1 T 2 Z 1 R

2

Y

5

6 X Z

Figure 3-7 Translate Method where Surface 1 is Translated <1 90 0> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.3 67

Options

Close

2 3 1 2 1

T 1 Z Y

R

X Z 4

Figure 3-8 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

2 3 4 2 1 1

Y

T 1 Z X

R

Z

Figure 3-9 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <2 1 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Coordinate Frames §3.3 68

Options

Close

2 1 2 1 3

4

Y

T 1 Z X

R

Z

Figure 3-10 Scale Method where Curve 1 is Scaled <1 2 1> within Cylindrical Coordinate Frame 1 Points along the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system and at the origin of a spherical coordinate system cannot be transformed uniquely in the θ (cylindrical) or θ and φ (spherical) coordinates respectively. This is due to the fact that there is no unique θ for points on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or θ and φ coordinates at the origin of a spherical coordinate system. Therefore, in MSC.Patran, any point on the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system or at the origin of a spherical coordinate system is not transformed.

**PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions § 69
**

MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Geometry Modeling

Options

Close

CHAPTER

4

Create Actions

s Overview of Geometry Create Action s Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids s Creating Coordinate Frames s Creating Planes s Creating Vectors

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.1 70

Options

Close

4.1

**Overview of Geometry Create Action
**

Select any method to obtain detailed help.

Object Point

Method ❏ XYZ ❏ ArcCenter ❏ Extract ❏ Interpolate ❏ Intersect

Description Creates points from their cartesian coordinates or from existing nodes or vertices. Creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves. Creates points on existing curves at a parametric coordinate location. Creates one or more points between two existing point locations that are uniformly or nonuniformly spaced apart. Creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane. Creates a point on an existing curve. Creates a point at the location where a curve intersects or pierces a surface or solid face. Creates points from an existing set of points or vertices that are either projected normally or projected through a defined vector or projected through the current view angle, onto an existing surface or solid face. Creates curves through two, three or four point locations. Creates arced curves through a starting, middle and ending point locations. Creates a chained composite curve from two or more existing curves. Usually used for creating trimmed surfaces. Creates a conic curve based on a defined altitude and focal point and a starting and ending points. Creates a curve on an existing surface either at a parametric coordinate location or on an edge of the surface. Creates a fillet curve with a defined radius between two existing curves or edges. Creates a curve that passes through a set of point locations based on a least squares fit. Creates a curve at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces. Creates a curve on a a surface or solid face that is between two or more point locations. Creates a curve that is normal from an existing surface or solid face to a point location. Creates either constant or variable offset curves from an existing curve.

❏ Offset ❏ Pierce ❏ Project

Curve

❏ Point ❏ Arc3Point ❏ Chain ❏ Conic ❏ Extract ❏ Fillet ❏ Fit ❏ Intersect ❏ Manifold ❏ Normal ❏ Offset

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.1 71

Options

Close

Object Curve (cont.)

Method ❏ Project

Description Creates curves from an existing set of curves or edges that is projected onto a surface either normally or from a defined plane or vector or based on the current view angle. Creates contiguous straight curves between two or more point locations. Creates a spline curve that passes through two or more point locations. Creates a curve that is tangent between two curves or edges. Creates a curve from a point location to a tangent point on a curve. Creates a curve at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its length and orientation. Creates involute curves either using an Angles option or a Radii option. Creates curves that are rotated from point locations about a rotation axis for a defined angle. Creates straight curves that are perpendicular to an existing curve or edge and that lies within a defined plane. Creates a circle within a defined plane. Creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that uses a starting, ending and center point locations. Creates an arced curve that lies within a defined plane and that passes through a starting, middle and ending point locations. Creates surfaces that passes through either two, three, four or N curves or edges. Create surfaces that are composed from multiple surfaces. Creates surfaces from an existing surface (usually a trimmed surface) based on four cursor defined vertices that lie on the existing surface. Creates surfaces from three or four curves or edges. Creates a surface within a solid based on either the parametric coordinate location or on the face of the solid. Creates a filleted surface with one or two defined radii between two existing surfaces or faces. Creates a surface that is topologically congruent with one of the two specified surfaces. Creates constant offset surfaces from an existing surface. Creates a surface that is created between two existing curves or edges. Creates a trimmed surface that consist of an outer chained curve loop and optionally, an inner chained curve loop.

❏ PWL ❏ Spline ❏ TanCurve ❏ TanPoint ❏ XYZ ❏ Involute ❏ Revolve ❏ 2D Normal ❏ 2D Circle ❏ 2D ArcAngles ❏ 2D Arc2Point ❏ 2D Arc3Point Surface ❏ Curve ❏ Composite ❏ Decompose ❏ Edge ❏ Extract ❏ Fillet ❏ Match ❏ Offset ❏ Ruled ❏ Trimmed

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.1 72

Options

Close

Object Surface (cont.)

Method ❏ Vertex ❏ XYZ ❏ Extrude ❏ Glide ❏ Normal ❏ Revolve ❏ Mesh

Description Creates a surface from four point locations. Creates a surface at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its length and orientation. Creates a surface from an existing curve or edge that is extruded through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated. Creates a surface that is created from a specified director curve or edge, along one or more base curves or edges. Creates surfaces from existing curves through a defined thickness. Creates surfaces that are rotated from curves or edges about a rotation axis for a defined angle. Creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh (shell mesh). Creates a solid (block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus) with user input a point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created block, cylinder, cone, sphere or torus as the tool solid. Creates solids that pass through two, three, four or N surfaces or faces. Creates a B-rep solid from an existing set of surfaces that form a closed volume. Creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex locations on each face. Creates solids from five or six surfaces or faces. Creates solids from eight point locations. Creates a solid at a defined origin based on a vector that defines its length and orientation. Creates a solid from an existing surface or face that is extruded through a vector and is optionally scaled and rotated. Creates a solid that is created from a specified director curve or edge, along one or more base surfaces or faces. Creates solids from existing surfaces through a defined thickness. Creates solids that are rotated from surfaces or faces about a rotation axis for a defined angle.

Solid

❏ Primitive

❏ Surface ❏ B-rep ❏ Decompose ❏ Face ❏ Vertex ❏ XYZ ❏ Extrude ❏ Glide ❏ Normal ❏ Revolve

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.1 73

Options

Close

Object Coord

Method ❏ 3Point

Description Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based on defined point locations for its origin, a point on Axis 3 and a point on Plane 1-3. Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based on point locations that define the original and either points one Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1 Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame based on three rotation angles about Axes 1, 2 and 3. Creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame whose Axis 3 is normal to a specified surface or solid face, and whose origin is at a point location. Creates a plane from a specified point as the plane origin and a specified direction as the plane normal. Creates a plane from a point on or projected onto a specified curve as the plane origin and the curve tangent at that point as the plane normal. Creates a plane from the interpolating points on a specified curve as the plane origins and the curve tangents at those points as the plane normals. Creates a plane from the least square based on three and more specified non-colinear points. Creates a plane that is parallel to a specified plane with a specified offset distance. Creates a plane from a specified point on or projected to a specified surface as the plane origin and the surface normal at that location as the plane normal. Creates a plane from three specified non-colinear points. The plane origin is located at the first point. Creates planes at a point and normal to a vector. Creates a vector by specifying the vector base point, the vector direction and the vector magnitude of the desired vector. Creates a vector along the intersecting line of two specified planes. The vector base point is the projection of the first plane origin on that intersecting line. Creates a vector that has the direction parallel to a specified plane and the base point at a specified point on or projected onto that plane. Creates a vector that is the cross product of two specified vectors and has its base point located at the base point of the first vector. Creates a vector that starts from a specified base point and pointing to a specified tip point.

❏ Axis

❏ Euler ❏ Normal

Plane

❏ Vector Normal ❏ Curve Normal

❏ Interpolate

❏ Least Squares ❏ Offset ❏ Surface Tangent ❏ 3 Points ❏ Point-Vector Vector ❏ Magnitude ❏ Intersect

❏ Normal ❏ Product ❏ 2 Point

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 74

Options

Close

4.2

**Creating Points, Curves, Surfaces and Solids
**

Create Points at XYZ Coordinates or Point Locations (XYZ Method)

The XYZ method creates points from their cartesian coordinates or at an existing node, vertex or other point location as provided in the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point XYZ

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Point Coordinate List, within the reference frame. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing cartesian coordinates or point location for the new points, either by entering the coordinates from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.3.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Point ID List

5 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

Auto Execute

Point Coordinates List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 75

Options

Close

Point XYZ Method Example Creates Point 6 using the Create/XYZ method that is located at the global rectangular coordinates X = 10, Y = 5 and Z = 3.125.

Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point XYZ

Before:

3

2

Point ID List

6 1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Point Coordinates List
**

[10 5 3.125] Z

Y X

4

5

-Apply-

After:

3

2

1

Y X

4

6

Z

5

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 76

Options

Close

Point XYZ Method On a Surface Example Creates Point 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icons listed below which locates Point 5 on Surface 1, whose exact location is cursor defined. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point XYZ

2 3

Before:

Point ID List

5 1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Point Coordinates List
**

Construct Point Surface Point

1

Y Z X

4

-Apply-

After:

2

3

1 5

1

Y Z X

4

Point Select Menu Icons

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 77

Options

Close

Point XYZ Method At Nodes Example Creates Points 1 through 4 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which locates the points at Nodes 10 through 13. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point XYZ

10 11

Before:

Point ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0 12 13

**Auto Execute Point Coordinates List
**

Node 10:13

Y Z X

-Apply-

After:

1 2

3

4

Y Z X

Point Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 78

Options

Close

Point XYZ Method At Screen Location Example Creates Points 1 through 5 using the Create/XYZ/Point select menu icon listed below which locates Points 1 through 5 by cursor defining them on the screen.

Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point XYZ

Before:

Point ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Auto Execute Point Coordinates List [1.596433 0.096824 0.000000]

Y

Z

X

-Apply-

After:

1 2

3

4 5 Y Z X

Point Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 79

Options

Close

**Create Point ArcCenter
**

The ArcCenter method creates a point at the center of curvature of the specified curves which have a non-zero center/radius of curvature. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Method: Arc Center Point ID List
**

48

Auto Execute Curve List

-Apply-

Specify the existing curves or edges either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 80

Options

Close

Point ArcCenter Method Example Creates point 3 using Create/Point/Arc Center which locates point 3 in the center of the arc. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

1

**Method: Arc Center Point ID List
**

3

2

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1

Y Z

-Apply-

X

1

After:

1

2

Y Z X

3 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 81

Options

Close

Extracting Points

Extracting Points from Curves and Edges

Creates points on an existing set of curves or edges at the parametric ξ 1 coordinate location of the curve or edge, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Select the curve icon to extract a point from a curve.

Point ID List

5

If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of the curve. Specify the curve’s or edge’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the connectivity of the curve or edge. You can plot the ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Parametric Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

**u Parametric Value Auto Execute
**

Curve List

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

-Apply-

Specify the existing curves or edges to extract points from, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 82

Options

Close

Point Extract Method Example Creates Point 7 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.75, on Curve 1. Notice that the curve’s parametric direction arrow is displayed. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

6

Before:

1

1

Point ID List

7

**Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Parametric Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.75

5 Y Z X

After:

**u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve List Curve 1
**

1 6

-Apply-

1 7

5 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 83

Options

Close

Point Extract Method Example Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.75, on the edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

2 3

Before:

1

Point ID List

5

**Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Parametric Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.75

1

Y Z X

4

After:

**u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve List Surface 1.4
**

1 2 5 3

-Apply-

1

Y Z X

4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 84

Options

Close

**Extracting Single Points from Surfaces or Faces
**

Creates single points on an existing set of surfaces or faces at a specified u,v parametric location on the surface. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

Select the icon to create a Single Point.

Point ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the surface or faces’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value , which have a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ 1 , ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Parametric Position 0.0 1.0

0.5

u Parametric Value 0.0 1.0

0.5

**v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List
**

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

-Apply-

Specify the existing surfaces or faces to create points on, either by cursor selecting the surfaces or faces or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 85

Options

Close

Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Method Example Creates Point 5 using the Create/Extract Point from Surface or Face method, where the point is located at ξ 1 ( u ) is equal to 0.333 and ξ 2 ( v ) is equal to 0.666, on Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

Before:

2 3

1

Point ID List

1

Parametric Position 0.0 1.0

0.333

Y Z X

1

4

u Parametric Value 0.0 1.0

0.666

After:

2 3

**v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

5 1

-Apply-

Y Z X

1

4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 86

Options

Close

**Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces
**

Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of points is defined by a diagonal of two points. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

Select the icon to create Multiple Points.

Point ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Number of Points u Direction
**

2 Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction of the surface.

v Direction

2

Bounds Diagonal Points Parametric Auto Execute Point 1 List

Specify the Bounds as Diagonal Points when two point locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points to be extracted from the surface.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the two points to define the diagonal for the points, either by cursor selecting the points or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 or Curve 1.1, Surface 1.1.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points. Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.

Point 2 List

Surface List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 87

Options

Close

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Diagonal Method Example Creates Points 7 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by points 5 and 6. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

6 1

Before:

2 3

5

Point ID List

7

**Number of Points u Direction
**

4

Y Z X

1

4

v Direction

6

After:

2 3

**Bounds Diagonal Points Parametric Auto Execute Point 1 List
**

Point 5

26 22 18 14 10 5

27 23 19 1 15 11 7

28 24 20 16 12 8

6 25 21 17 13 9

Point 2 List

Point 6

Y

Surface List

Surface 1

1 X

4

Z

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 88

Options

Close

**Extracting Multiple Points from Surfaces or Faces
**

Creates multiple points on an existing set of surfaces or faces where the bounds of the grid of points is defined by a parametric ξ , ξ 2 diagonal. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

Select the icon to create Multiple Points.

Point ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Number of Points u Direction
**

2 Specify the number of points to create in the u and v direction of the surface.

v Direction

2 Specify the Bounds as Parametric when two parametric locations are to be used to define the boundary for the points to be extracted from the surface.

Bounds Diagonal Points Parametric

Display the Parametric Bounds form to define the u,v parametric locations to define the bounds of the points.

**[Parametric Bounds...] Auto Execute Surface List
**

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing surface or face to create points on, either by cursor selecting the surface or face by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 or Solid 5.1 The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface or face.

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 89

Options

Close

Multiple Point Extract from Surfaces or Faces Parametric Method Example Creates Points 5 through 28 on Surface 1 in the bounds defined by u-min=0.333, u-max=0.666, vmin=0.333, and v-max=0.666. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Extract

Before:

2 3

1

Point ID List

5

**Number of Points u Direction
**

4

Y Z X

1

4

v Direction

6

After:

2 3

**Bounds Diagonal Points Parametric [Parametric Bounds...] Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

25 21 17 13 9 5

26 22 18 1 14 10 6

27 23 19 15 11 7

28 24 20 16 12 8

Y

1 X

4

-Apply-

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 90

Options

Close

**Parametric Bounds for Extracting Points from a Surface
**

Parametric Bounds u v Bounds 0.0 u-Min 0.0 u-Max 0.0 v-Min 0.0 v-Max Reset 1.0

1.0

1.0

0.0

Specify the surface’s x1 (u) and x2 (v) coordinate values for the definition of the bounds of the points, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The x1and x2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. (x1 has a range of 0 £ x1 £ 1 and x2 has a range of 0 £ x2 £ 1) You can plot the x1 and x2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.0

OK

Cancel

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 91

Options

Close

Interpolating Points

Between Two Points

The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Enter the number of interior points you want to create between the specified point locations in the Point 1 and Point 2 Coordinates List.

**Method: Interpolate Point ID List
**

5

**Option: Point Number of Interior Points
**

1

Point Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x

Select either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in the Point 1 Coordinates listbox, the starting point location to begin the interpolation. Specify in the Point 2 Coordinates listbox, the ending point location to end the interpolation. You can express the point location either by entering the location’s cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes or other point locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.3.1.

Auto Execute

Point 1 Coordinates List

Point 2 Coordinates List

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 92

Options

Close

Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example Creates five interior points starting with Point 3 that are between Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Interpolate/Point option. The spacing is nonuniform at L2/L1 = 2.0. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Interpolate Point ID List
**

3

**Option: Point Number of Interior Points
**

5

1

2

Number of Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x L1 L2

Y Z X

After:

L2/L1 =

2.0

**Auto Execute Point 1 Coordinates List
**

Point 1 1 3 4 5 6 7 2

**Point 2 Coordinates List
**

Point 2

-ApplyY Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 93

Options

Close

Point Interpolate Method With Point Option Example Same as the previous example, except the five new points are uniformly spaced between Nodes 1 and 2, by using the Point select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

2

Before:

**Method: Interpolate Point ID List
**

1

**Option: Point Number of Interior Points
**

5

1

**Number of Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x
**

Y Z X

After:

2

**Auto Execute Point 1 Coordinates List
**

Node 1 1 2 1 4 3

5

**Point 2 Coordinates List
**

Node 2

-ApplyY Z X

Point Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 94

Options

Close

**Interpolating Points on a Curve
**

The Interpolate method using the Curve option creates n points along an existing curve or edge of uniform or nonuniform spacing where n is the number of interior points to be created.

Enter the number of interior points you want to create along the curves or edges that are specified in the Curve listbox.

**Geometry Action: Object: Create Point
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the arc length parameterization of the curve. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, MSC.Patran will create the point(s) based on the equal parametric values of the curve. Choose either button for Uniform or Nonuniform point spacing for the new interior points. If Nonuniform is ON, then enter the value for L2/L1, where L2/L1 is 0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1.0 or L2/L1 ≤ 1.0. The starting point of where L1 and L2 is measured from is at the curve’s or edge’s parametric origin, which is defined by its connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

**Method: Interpolate Point ID List
**

5

Option: Curve Number of Interior Points Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Point Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the existing curves or edges to create points on, either by cursor selecting the curves or edges or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

Auto Execute

Curve List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Geometric Attributes (p. 257) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 95

Options

Close

Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example Creates five uniformly spaced interior points, starting with Point 6 on Curve 1, using the Create/Point/Interpolate/Curve option. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Interpolate Point ID List
**

6 5 1 1

**Option: Curve Number of Interior Points
**

5

Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Point Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x

Y Z X

After:

6

7

5 8 1 9 10

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1

1

-Apply-

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 96

Options

Close

Point Interpolate Method With Curve Option Example Creates Points 5 through 9 that are nonuniformly spaced by using the Create/Interpolate/Curve option, where the points are created on an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

2 3

Before:

**Method: Interpolate Point ID List
**

5

**Option: Curve Number of Interior Points
**

5

1

Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Point Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x L1 L2

2 1 Y 1 Z X 4

After:

2

5

6

7

8

9

3

L2/L1 =

2.0

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1 1

-Apply1

2 Y 1 Z X 4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 97

Options

Close

**Intersecting Two Entities to Create Points
**

The Intersect method creates points at the intersection of any of the following pairs of entities: Curve/Curve, Curve/Surface, Curve/Plane, Vector/Curve, Vector/Surface, Vector/Plane. One point will be created at each intersection location. The pair of entities should intersect within a value defined by the Global Model Tolerance. If the entities do not intersect, MSC.Patran will create a point at the closest approach on each specified curve, edge, or vector for the Curve/Curve and Vector/Curve intersection options. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Options for 1st entity to intersect: 1. Curve (or edge of a surface) 2. Vector

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

24

Options for 2nd entity to intersect:

Option: <Type> Option: <Type> Auto Execute <Type> List

1. Curve (or edge of a surface) 2. Surface 3. Plane By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

<Type> List

The <Type> list changes depending on the option selected. Specify in List 1 and List 2 the pair of intersecting entities at which to create points, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Select menus that appear can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate entities. The Global Model Tolerance that defines the tolerance value within which the two entities can intersect is defined on the Global Preferences form under the Preferences/Global menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Global Preferences (p. 290) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 98

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method At An Edge Example Creates Point 17, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curve 3 and an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

12 16 13

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

17 15 3

**Option: Curve Option: Curve
**

11 Y Z X

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 3

14

Curve List

Surface 1.2

After:

12

-Apply-

15

3

17

16

13

1

11 Y Z X 14

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 99

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method, at the intersection of Curves 1 and 2. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1 1

Option: Curve Option: Curve

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1 Y Z X 2

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply1

1

Y Z X

2

2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 100

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with Two Curves Example Creates Points 1 and 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Because the curves do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach of the two curves. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1 1 2

Option: Curve Option: Curve

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1 Y Z X

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply-

1 1

2 2

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 101

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Surface Example Creates Points 1, 2 and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 6 with Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

6 11

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1

**Option: Curve Option: Surface Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 6 Z Y X

Surface List

Surface 1

After:

-Apply6 1 1 2 3

1

Z

Y X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 102

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with a Curve and a Plane Example Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Curve 2 with Plane 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1 2

**Option: Curve Option: Plane
**

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 2 Y Z X

Plane List

Plane 1

After:

-Apply1

2

2

1

3 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 103

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example Creates Points 1, 2, and 3 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 with Curve 2. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1 2

**Option: Vector Option: Curve
**

1

**Auto Execute Vector List
**

Vector 1 Y Z X

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply1

2

2

1

3 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 104

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Curve Example Creates Point 1 on Vector 1 and Point 2 on Curve 2, using the Create/Intersect method. Since the entities do not intersect, Points 1 and 2 are created at the closest approach between the Vector and the Curve. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1 2

**Option: Vector Option: Curve
**

1 Y Z X

**Auto Execute Vector List
**

Vector 1

Curve List

Curve 2

After:

-Apply-

1

2 2

1 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 105

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Surface Example Creates Points 1 and 2 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 1 and Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1 1

**Option: Vector Option: Surface Auto Execute Vector List
**

Vector 1 Z 1

Y X

Surface List

Surface 1

After:

-Apply-

2

1

1

1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 106

Options

Close

Point Intersect Method with a Vector and a Plane Example Creates Point 1 using the Create/Intersect method at the intersection of Vector 2 and Plane 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Point

Before:

**Method: Intersect Point ID List
**

1 1 2

**Option: Vector Option: Plane
**

Y Z X

**Auto Execute Vector List
**

Vector 2

Plane List

Plane 1

After:

-Apply-

2

1

1

Y Z

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 107

Options

Close

**Creating Points by Offsetting a Specified Distance
**

The Offset method creates a point on an existing curve by offsetting a specified model space distance from an existing point on the same curve.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Offset
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Point ID List

1

Offset Distance

Input the Model Space offset distance from an existing point on a curve (curve to be input).

Auto Execute Reference Point List

Specify the existing points on the curve either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 Curve 5.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points or vertices.

**Curve/Point List
**

Specify in Curve/Point List, the existing curve or edge, along with a point on the curve which indicates the direction in which the offset will be taken. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Global Preferences (p. 290) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 108

Options

Close

Point Offset Method Example Creates point 3 on curve one, .75 units from point 1 using Create/Point/Offset. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Offset

Before:

1

Point ID List

3

Offset Distance

0.75

**Auto Execute Reference Point List
**

Point 1 Z

1 Y X

2

**Curve/Point List
**

Geometry (Curve 1)

-Apply-

After:

1

3 1

Y Z X

2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 109

Options

Close

**Piercing Curves Through Surfaces to Create Points
**

The Pierce method creates points at the intersection between an existing curve or edge and a surface or solid face. The curve or edge must completely intersect with the surface or solid face. If the curve or edge intersects the surface or face more than one time, MSC.Patran will create a point at each intersection. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Pierce

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Point ID List

1 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Curve List

Surface List

Specify in Curve List the existing curves or edges that intersect the surfaces and faces listed in the Surface listbox. Specify in Surface List the existing surfaces or faces that intersect with the curves and edges. You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1. The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves, edges, surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 110

Options

Close

Point Pierce Method Example Creates Point 15, using the Create/Pierce method at the location where Curve 3 intersects Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Pierce

1 11 3 1 12 14

Before:

Point ID List

15

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 3

5

Surface List

Surface 1 Z

Y X 13

-Apply-

After:

14

1 11 3 15 1

5 12

Y Z X 13

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 111

Options

Close

Point Pierce Method Example This example is the same as the previous example, except the curve is defined by Points 13 and 14 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Pierce

1 11 1 14

Before:

Point ID List

15

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Construct 2 Point Curve

5 12

Surface List

Surface 1 Z

Y X 13

-Apply-

After:

14

1 11 15 1

5 12

Y Z X 13

Curve Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 112

Options

Close

**Projecting Points Onto Surfaces or Faces
**

The Project method creates points by projecting an existing set of points onto a surface or solid face through a defined Projection Vector. New points can be projected from other points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next point to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Project
**

Normal to Surf option will project the existing points by using the normal direction of the specified surface or face. Define Vector option allows you to specify the coordinates of the Projection Vector and the Refer. Coordinate Frame to express the vector within. (Example: <1 1 0>). The Vector Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector direction. View Vector option will project the existing points by using the view angle of the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the normal direction of the screen.

Point ID List

5

**Project onto: Surface Option: Normal to Surf Projection Vector
**

<0 0 0>

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Projection Vector and Refer. Coordinate Frame is used if the Define Vector option is chosen.

Delete Original Points Auto Execute

If ON, after Project completes the existing points specified in Point List will be deleted from the database.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 113

Options

Close

Projection Vector

<0 0 0>

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Delete Original Points Auto Execute Point List

Specify in Point List the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations that you want to project onto the surfaces or faces specified in the Surface List box. Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the points will be projected onto. You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: For points - Point 1:10, Curve 5.1 Surface 5.1.1; For surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1. The Point Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, surfaces or faces.

Surface List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Viewing Menu (p. 219) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 114

Options

Close

Point Project Method With Normal to Surf Option Example Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. Points 13:16, 18:20 and Node 1 are all projected normally onto Surface 1. Notice Delete Original Points is pressed in. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Project

11 14 1 13 10

Before:

Point ID List

21

15 16

**Project onto: Surface Option: Normal to Surf Projection Vector
**

<0 0 0> ZX 12 Y

1

18 209 19

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Delete Original Points Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 13:16 18:20 Node 1

After:

10

11 22

23 24

Surface List

Surface 10

1 21

-Apply26 Y ZX 12 28 27 9

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 115

Options

Close

Point Project Method With Define Vector Option Example Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Point/Project/Define Vector option. The points are projected onto Surface 1 through the vector <-1 0 1> that is expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame, Coord 1. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Project

10 15 16 Y 17 1 Z 1 X 13 14 11

Before:

Point ID List

13

Project onto: Surface Option: Define Vector

18

20 19 12

Projection Vector

<-1 0 1>

Y 9 Z X

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 1

**Delete Original Points Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 13:20

After:

10 23 24 22 Y 25 21 1 Z 1 X

11

Surface List

Surface 1

-Apply26 Y 9 Z X 27 12 28

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 116

Options

Close

Point Project Method With View Vector Option Example Creates Points 21 through 28, using the Create/Project/View Vector option. The points are projected onto Surface 1 using the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Points is pressed in and Points 13 through 20 are deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Point Project

10 15 16 Y 17 1 Z 1 X 13 14 11

Before:

Point ID List

21

**Project onto: Surface Option:
**

View Vector Y

18 19 9 Z X

20 12

Projection Vector

<0 0 0>

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

After:

Delete Original Points Auto Execute Point List

Point 13:20 10 23 24 Y 25 1 Z 1 X 21 22 11

Surface List

Surface 1

-ApplyY 9 Z X

26 27

28 12

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 117

Options

Close

**Creating Curves Between Points
**

Creating Curves Through 2 Points

The Point method using the 2 Point option creates straight parametric cubic curves between two existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve ID List

1

**Option: 2 Point Auto Execute
**

Starting Point List

Ending Point List

Specify the starting and ending point locations for the new curves. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 118

Options

Close

Curve Point Method With 2 Point Option Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Point/2 Point option, which is between Point 1 and Node 10. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Point

10

Before:

Curve ID List

3

**Option: 2 Point Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

Point 1 Y Z X 1

**Ending Point List
**

Node 10

-Apply-

After:

2 10

3

1 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 119

Options

Close

**Creating Curves Through 3 Points
**

The Point method using the 3 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through three existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

1

**Create Curve Point
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

**Option: 3 Point Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x 0.0 1.0
**

0.5 Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u ) parametric position of the middle point for the new curve, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by selecting the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead, MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior points are located.

u Value of Middle Point

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 120

Options

Close

**Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x 0.0 1.0
**

0.5 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**u Value of Middle Point Auto Execute
**

Starting Point List

Middle Point List

Ending Point List

Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 121

Options

Close

Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/3 Point option, which is created through Points 1 and 2 and Node 10. Point 2 is located on the curve at x1(u) =0.5. Geometry Create Action: Curve Object: Method:

1

Before:

10

Point

**Curve ID List Option: 3 Point Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x 0.0 1.0
**

0.5 Z X 1 2

Y

**u Value of Middle Point Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

Point 1

After:

10

**Middle Point List
**

Point 2

**Ending Point List
**

Node 10

-Apply1 2

Y Z

1

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 122

Options

Close

Curve Point Method With 3 Point Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Point 2 is located on the curve at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.75, instead of 0.5. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Point

Before:

10

Curve ID List

1

**Option: 3 Point Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x 0.0 1.0
**

0.75 Y Z 1 2

X

**u Value of Middle Point Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

Point 1

After:

10

**Middle Point List
**

Point 2

**Ending Point List
**

Node 10

-Apply1 1

2

Y Z

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 123

Options

Close

**Creating Curves Through 4 Points
**

The Point method using the 4 Point option creates parametric cubic curves that pass through four existing point locations where the starting point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 0 and the ending point defines the curve at ξ 1 = 1 . The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Point

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

**Option: 4 Point Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x
**

[Parametric Positions...] Parametric Position allows you to specify the ξ 1 ( u ) parametric position of the second and third points on the new curve, where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . Press the Parametric Positions button to enter the ξ 1 locations for both points. The direction of ξ 1 is defined by the order of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot the curve’s ξ 1 direction by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric. Chord Length will disable the slide bar and databox. Instead, MSC.Patran will calculate the parametric coordinates of the points along the curve, based on the chord length distances relative to the locations of the curve’s interior points. This means the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior points are located.

Auto Execute

Starting Point List

Second Point List

Third Point List

Ending Point List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 124

Options

Close

**Option: 4 Point Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x
**

[Parametric Positions...] By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Starting Point List

Second Point List

Third Point List

Specify the starting, second, third and ending point locations for the new curve to pass through. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Ending Point List

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 125

Options

Close

Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Point/4 Point option, which is created through Points 1, 2 and 3 and Node 10. Point 2 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.333 and Point 3 is located at ξ 1 ( u ) =0.667. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Point

3 10

Before:

Curve ID List

1

**Option: 4 Point Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x [Parametric Positions...]
**

Z X 1 2

Y

**Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

Point 1

After:

10

**Second Point List
**

Point 2

**Third Point List
**

Point 3 3

**Ending Point List
**

Node 10 2 1

-ApplyY Z 1

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 126

Options

Close

Curve Point Method With 4 Point Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Point 2 is located at x1(u) =0.25 and Point 3 is located at x1(u) =0.80. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Point

3 10

Before

Curve ID List

3

Option: 4 Point Parameterization Method x Parametric Position x Chord Length x [Parametric Positions...] Auto Execute Starting Point List

Point 1 1 2

Y Z

X

After:

10

**Second Point List
**

Point 2

**Third Point List
**

Point 3 3

**Ending Point List
**

Node 10 2 1

-ApplyY Z 1

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 127

Options

Close

Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions Subordinate Form This subordinate form is displayed when the Parametric Positions button is pressed on the Geometry Application’s Create/Curve/Point form for the 4 Point option. Curve 4 Point Parametric Positions 0.0 1.0

0.333 Enter the ξ 1 (C1) parametric position for the second and third point locations that are specified in the Second Point List and Third Point Listboxes, where 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 . This defines where these two points will occupy on the new curve. Either use the slide bars or enter the ξ 1 value in each databox. Moving the slidebar will automatically update the databox value.

**u Parametric Value of second point 0.0 1.0
**

0.667

u Parametric Value of third point OK Cancel

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

The direction of ξ1 is defined by the order of the point locations specified in the Starting Point List and Ending Point List, which defines the new curve’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menus Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

ξ 1 values. Press Cancel if you want to exit the form and not change the specified ξ 1 values.

Press OK to update the

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 128

Options

Close

**Creating Arced Curves (Arc3Point Method)
**

The Arc3Point method creates true arced curves that pass through three specified point locations. MSC.Patran calculates the arc’s center point location and the radius and angle of the arc. The three point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations that are provided on the Point select menu.

If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the center location of the arc.

**Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Arc3Point Curve ID List
**

1

**Curves per Arc
**

1

If PATRAN 2 Convention is pressed, enter the number of curves to be created for each arc definition. Otherwise, the Curves pre Arc databox is disabled.

**Create Center Point Auto Execute
**

Starting Point List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Middle Point List Specify the starting, middle and ending point locations for the new arc to pass through. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Ending Point List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 129

Options

Close

Curve Arc3Point Method Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Arc3Point method, which creates a true arc through Points 1 through 3. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed which created Point 4. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

2

Before:

**Method: Arc3Point Curve ID List
**

3

**Curves per Arc
**

1

**Create Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

Point 1 3

Y 1 Z X

**Middle Point List
**

Point 2

After:

**Ending Point List
**

Point 3 2

-Apply-

Y 3 Z X 4 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 130

Options

Close

Curve Arc3Point Method Example This example is similar to the previous example, except that the point locations for the arc are specified with point coordinate locations. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method: Arc3Point Curve ID List
**

3

**Curves per Arc
**

1

**Create Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

[-1 0 0]

Y Z X

**Middle Point List
**

[0 1 0]

After:

**Ending Point List
**

[1 0 0] 2

-Apply-

Y 3 Z X 4 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 131

Options

Close

**Creating Chained Curves
**

The Chain method creates a chained composite curve from one or more existing curves or edges. The existing curves and edges must be connected end to end. If a chained curve is used to create planer or general trimmed surfaces for an inner loop, they must form a closed loop. Chained curves are used to create planar or general trimmed surfaces using the Create/Surface/Trimmed form. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Chain

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1 Auto Chain...

If selected, the Auto Chaining form is displayed to enable auto chaining of existing curves. If ON, after Chain completes, the existing curves specified in the Curve List will be deleted from the database.

Delete Constituent Curves Curve List

-Apply-

Specify the existing curves or edges to chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Creating Trimmed Surfaces (p. 278) • Disassembling a Chained Curve (p. 429)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 132

Options

Close

Curve Chain Method Example Creates Curve 11, using the Create/Chain method, which is created from Curves 3 through 10. Notice that Delete Constituent Curves is pressed and Curves 3 through 10 are deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Chain

Before:

8 9 7 8 6 10 7 4 6 5 4 5 3

Curve ID List

11

**Auto Chain... Delete Constituent Curves Curve List
**

Curve 3:10 Y Z X 1 3 2

-Apply-

After:

8 7 4 11 3

6

5

1 Y Z X

2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 133

Options

Close

**Creating Conic Curves
**

The Conic method creates parametric cubic curves representing a conic section (that is, hyperbola, parabola, ellipse, or circular arc), by specifying point locations for the starting and ending points of the conic and the conic’s focal point. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Conic

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1 Used by the Focal Point List and the Starting and Ending Point Lists to express the point’s coordinate values that may be entered within the specified coordinate frame. Example: Coord 5. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

**Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

Conic Altitude for Parabola

Enter a value for the altitude of the conic either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox.

Focal Point

Conic Altitude

Conic Curve

Starting Point

Ending Point

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 134

Options

Close

**Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

**Conic Altitude for Parabola Auto Execute
**

Focal Point List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Starting Point List Specify the focal point location, and the starting and ending point locations that defines a conic section. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Ending Point List

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 135

Options

Close

Curve Conic Method Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Conic method whose focal point is Point 3, the starting and ending points are Points 1 and 2, and the conic altitude is 0.50. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Conic

Before:

3

Curve ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

Y Z X 1 2

**Conic Altitude for Parabola Auto Execute Focal Point List
**

Point 3

After:

3

**Starting Point List
**

Point 1

**Ending Point List
**

Point 2 1

-Apply-

Y Z X 1 2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 136

Options

Close

Curve Conic Method Example This is the same as the previous example, except that the conic altitude is increased to 0.75 from 0.50 for Curve 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Conic

3

Before:

Curve ID List

2

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

1

**Conic Section Classification 0.0 1.0
**

0.75

Y Z X 1 2

**Conic Altitude for Parabola Auto Execute Focal Point List
**

Point 3

After:

3

**Starting Point List
**

Point 1 2

**Ending Point List
**

Point 2

-Apply-

1

Y Z X 1 2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 137

Options

Close

**Extracting Curves From Surfaces
**

Extracting Curves from Surfaces Using the Parametric Option

The Extract method creates curves on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by specifying the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 or ξ 2 coordinate location where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 and ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 . Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Extract

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

**Option: Parametric Curve Direction x u Direction x v Direction x Curve Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5 Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) or ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value for the location of the curve, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric. Choose either Constant u Direction or Constant v Direction. The curves will either be created along either the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction or along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction.

v Parametric Value

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 138

Options

Close

**Curve Direction x u Direction x v Direction x Curve Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List

-Apply-

Specify the existing surfaces or faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 Solid 5.1. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 139

Options

Close

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Curve 1, using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The curve is created on Surface 2 at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75. Notice that the parametric direction is displayed. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Extract

7 2 1

Before:

Curve ID List

1 8 2 10

**Option: Parametric Curve Direction x u Direction x x v Direction Curve Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.75

Y Z X 9

**v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 2

After:

7 2 1

-Apply8

11

1 2 1 10

Y Z X 9

12

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 140

Options

Close

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve X is created at ξ 1 ( u ) = 0.75, instead of ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.75. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Extract

Before:

7 2 1

Curve ID List

1 8

**Option: Parametric Curve Direction x u Direction x v Direction x Curve Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.75 Z

2 10

Y X 9

**v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 2

After:

7 2 1

-Apply-

8 2 1 1 Y Z X 12 9 11 10

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 141

Options

Close

Curve Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Curve 3 which is at ξ 2 ( v ) = 0.25 on a surface defined by Curve 2 and an edge of Surface 1 by using the Surface select menu icons listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Extract

1 2

Before:

3

Curve ID List

3

**Option: Parametric Curve Direction x u Direction x x v Direction Curve Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.25 6 1 2 Y Z X 7

5

**v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List
**

Construct2CurveSurface(Ev

After:

3

8 1 2

-Apply3 6 1 2 Y Z X 7 9 5

Surface Select Menu Icons

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 142

Options

Close

**Extracting Curves From Surfaces Using the Edge Option
**

The Extract method creates curves on specified edges of existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Extract

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

Option:

Edge

Auto Execute Edge List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Edge List, the existing edges of the surfaces or solid faces for the curves to be created on, either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1.1 Solid 5.1.1.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 143

Options

Close

Curve Extract Method With Edge Option Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Extract/Edge option. The curve is created on one of the edges of Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Extract

5

Before:

Curve ID List

3 6 1 2 1

Option:

Edge

2

1

**Auto Execute Edge List
**

Surface 1.2

Y 3 X 4

-Apply-

Z

After:

1 5 3

6 2 1 1 2 1

Y 3 X Z 4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 144

Options

Close

**Creating Fillet Curves
**

The fillet method is intended for use with 2D construction. The created curve is a circular arc. For this reason, the method will not work if the provided curves are not co-planar. The Patran 2.5 switch overrides this requirement and places no restriction on coplanarity. The result is a single cubic line so that it is more like a slope continuous blend between the 2 curves. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

1

**Create Curve Fillet
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

Curves per Fillet specifies the number of curves you want to create for each defined fillet arc. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2 Convention. Fillet Radius specifies a real value for the radius of the fillet arc. Only one radius value is allowed which is applied to all specified curves or edges/points that are entered in the Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Fillet Tolerance specifies the accuracy MSC.Patran uses when it subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position. Decreasing the value helps when the fillet is very small compared to the geometry. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2 Convention.

**Fillet Parameters Curves per Fillet
**

1

**Fillet Radius Fillet Tolerance
**

0.005

**Trim Original Curves Auto Execute
**

Curve/Point 1 List If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original curves specified in the Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original curve.

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-

Calculated Center Radius New Fillet Curve Curve 2 Endpoint

Curve 1 Endpoint

Portions to Trim

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 145

Options

Close

**Fillet Parameters Curves per Fillet
**

1

**Fillet Radius Fillet Tolerance
**

0.005

**Trim Original Curves Auto Execute
**

Curve/Point 1 List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to Press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-

Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the existing pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the fillet will be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 146

Options

Close

Curve Fillet Method Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and Point 4 and Curve 2 and Point 5, with a radius of 0.5. Notice Trim Original Curves is pressed. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Fillet

6

Before:

1

Curve ID List

3 1 2

**Fillet Parameters Curves per Fillet
**

1

5

Fillet Radius

0.5 Y Z X 4

Fillet Tolerance

0.005

**Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Curve/Point 1 List
**

ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve

After:

1

**Curve/Point 2 List
**

ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve

6

-Apply2 5

8

3 7

1 Y Z X 4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 147

Options

Close

Curve Fillet Method Example Creates Curve 3, using the Create/Fillet method. The fillet curve is created between Curve 1 and Point 2 and Curve 2 and Point 3, with a radius of 0.25. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Fillet

1 4 3 2

Before:

Curve ID List

3

**Fillet Parameters Curves per Fillet
**

1

Fillet Radius

0.25 2 X

Y Z 1

Fillet Tolerance

0.005

**Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Curve/Point 1 List
**

ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 3 6 3 ConstructPointCurveUOnCurve 5 2 1 4

After:

Curve/Point 2 List

-Apply-

2 X

Y Z 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 148

Options

Close

**Fitting Curves Through a Set of Points
**

The Fit method creates a parametric cubic curve by fitting it through a set of two or more point locations. MSC.Patran uses a parametric least squares numerical approximation for the fit. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Fit

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1 Number of Curves to Create specifies the number of curves to create to represent the fit through the specified points. Convergence Tolerance is used when the Number of Iterations is greater than zero. This value, measured in model units, defines the maximum the interior points will deviate from a calculated spline of the original curves that are used in the synthesis of the new curves. Default is .005. Number of Iterations is zero by default. If zero, MSC.Patran will create smooth, evenly parameterized curves. If it is greater than zero, as the value increases, the curve fit will be more accurate, but they will become more nonuniformly parameterized and they may have unwanted kinks or oscillations.

**Fit Parameters Number of Curves to Create
**

1

Convergence Tolerance

0.005

Number of Iterations

0

Point List

-Apply-

Specify the existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to fit the curve through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point locations.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 149

Options

Close

Curve Fit Method Example Creates three curves starting with Curve 1, using the Create/Fit method. The curve is created through Points 1 through 6. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Fit

6 2 3 5

Before:

Curve ID List

1

**Fit Parameters Number of Curves to Create
**

3

1 4 Y Z X

Convergence Tolerance

0.005

Number of Iterations

0

Point List

Point 1: 6

After:

-Apply2 7 3 5 1 2 4 Y Z X 8 3 6

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 150

Options

Close

**Creating Curves at Intersections
**

Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Surfaces

The Intersect method using the 2 Surface option creates curves at the intersection of two surfaces or solid faces. The two surfaces or faces must completely intersect each other. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

**Method: Intersect Curve ID List
**

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option:

2 Surface

Option: Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute Surface 1 List

If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 157) for more information.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Surface 2 List

Specify the existing pair of intersecting surfaces or solid faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Surface 10 Solid 10.1. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 151

Options

Close

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect method with the 2 Surface option. The curve is located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 2. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

2 4 6

Before:

**Method: Intersect Curve ID List
**

1

2 1

Option:

2 Surface

Intersect Parameters...

3

**Auto Execute Surface 1 List
**

Surface 1 Z

Y 5 X 1

Surface 2 List

Surface 2

After:

4 2 1 2 1 7 6

-Apply-

3 Y Z 5 X 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 152

Options

Close

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example This example is similar to the previous example, except the second surface is instead defined by Curves 2 and 3 by using the Surface select menu icon and selecting Curves 2 and 3 to create Surface 2. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

8 4 2

Before:

3

**Method: Intersect Curve ID List
**

4

Option:

2 Surface

1

**Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute Surface 1 List
**

Surface 1 Z Y X 7 1 2 3

Surface 2 List

Construct 2CurveSurface

After:

-Apply8 4 2 4 3

9

1

Y Z X 1 7

2

3

Surface Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 153

Options

Close

Curve Intersect Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Intersect/2 Surface option. The curve is located at the intersection of Surfaces 1 and 4. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method: Intersect Curve ID List
**

1 4 1

Option:

2 Surface

**Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute Surface 1 List
**

Surface 1 Z Y X

Surface 2 List

Surface 4

After:

-Apply1 4 1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 154

Options

Close

**Creating Curves at the Intersection of a Plane and a Surface
**

The Intersect method with the Plane-Surface option creates curves at the intersection of a defined plane and a surface or a solid face. The plane and the surface or face must completely intersect each other. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If pressed, the Intersect Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 157) for more information. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Plane List, one or more plane definitions that intersect with the specified surfaces or faces, either by entering the vector coordinates or by cursor defining them using the Vector Select menu. Examples: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, Coord 0.1. Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or solid faces either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

**Method: Intersect Curve ID List
**

1

Option:

Plane-Surface

Intersect Parameters...

Auto Execute Plane List

Surface List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 155

Options

Close

Curve Intersect Method With Plane-Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 1 and a plane whose normal is defined at {[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]}. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

2

**Method: Intersect Curve ID List
**

1 3

Option:

Plane-Surface

1

1

**Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute Plane List
**

{[0 2.5 0][0 3.5 0]} Z

Y X 4

Surface List

Surface 1

After:

-Apply2

5 1

3

1 Y Z X

6

4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 156

Options

Close

Curve Intersect Method With the Plane-Surface Option Example Creates Curve 1 which is located at the intersection of Surface 2 and a plane whose normal is defined by the Z axis of Coord 1, Coord 1.3, by using the Axis select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

6

Before:

**Method: Intersect Curve ID List
**

1 Z

Option:

Plane-Surface

2

1

T

R

**Intersect Parameters... Auto Execute Plane List
**

Coord 1.3 Z Y X 5

Surface List

Surface 2

After:

-Apply6

Z 2 1 1 T 7 R

Y Z X 5

Axis Select Menu Icon

3

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 157

Options

Close

**Intersect Parameters Subordinate Form
**

The Intersect Parameters subordinate form appears when the Intersect Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Intersect Parameters Curves per Intersection

0 Active if PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON, on the Create/Curve/Intersect application form. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create at each intersection. Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve intersection using a tolerance based cubic spline. Used by MSC.Patran to determine how many points to create to represent the curve intersection.

**Max. Deviation Tolerance
**

0.005

Intersect Tolerance

0.05

OK

**Cancel More Help:
**

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 158

Options

Close

**Creating Curves at the Intersection of Two Planes
**

This form is used to create a curve from the intersection of two planes. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Intersect

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If ON, MSC.Patran will create parametric cubic curves. Otherwise, the new curves will be a Straight Line geometry type. Parametric cubic geometry is supported by the PATRAN 2 Neutral File for import or export. If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in model units. By default, the length is calculated from the current viewport limits to simulate an infinite construction entity. If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called Length Calculation Points will appear. You must enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes that the curve length will be calculated from. Once the points have been entered, press the Calculate Curve Length button to display the curve length in the databox based on Distance, Deltax, Deltay, Deltaz selections By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Plane 1 List, one or more plane definitions that intersect with the specified planes in Plane 2 List, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes. Examples: Coord 0.1, Plane 1 Specify in Plane 2 List, one or more plane definitions that intersect with the specified planes in Plane 1 List, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. The Plane Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

Curve ID List

1

**Curve Type PATRAN 2 Convention Option: Curve Length Input Length Calculate Length
**

6.9282

2 Plane

Distance Deltax

Deltay Deltaz

Calculate Curve Length Auto Execute Plane 1 List

Plane 2 List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 159

Options

Close

Creating Curve Intersect from Two Planes Example Create curve 1 with a length of 0.334 from the intersection of plane 1 and 2. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Intersect

Before:

Curve ID List

1

1

Curve Type PATRAN 2 Convention

2

Option: Curve Length Input Length Calculate Length 2 Plane

Y Z X

0.334

Distance Deltax

Deltay Deltaz

After:

**Calculate Curve Length Auto Execute Plane 1 List
**

Plane 1

1

Plane 2 List

Plane 2

2

-ApplyY Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 160

Options

Close

**Manifold Curves Onto a Surface
**

Manifold Curves onto a Surface with the 2 Point Option

The Manifold method with the 2 Point option creates curves directly on an existing set of surfaces or solid faces by using two point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Manifold Curve ID List
**

1

**Option: Manifold Parameters... Option:
**

2 Point Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When this toggle is pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.

Auto Execute

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 161

Options

Close

Option:

2 Point

Auto Execute Surface List

Starting Point List

Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that the new curves will lie on, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2. Specify in Starting Point List and Ending Point List, the existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

Ending Point List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 162

Options

Close

Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option Example Creates three curves starting with Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/2 Point option. The curves are created on Surface 1 between Point 7 and Points 2,5 and 8. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

5 8 2 4

Before:

**Method: Manifold Curve ID List
**

1

Option: Manifold Parameters... Option: 2 Point

6

1

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

Y X Z

7

**Starting Point List
**

Point 7

**Ending Point List
**

Point 2 5 8

After:

-Apply8

5 2 4 6 1

4 Y X Z

2 7

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 163

Options

Close

Curve Manifold Method With the 2 Point Option On a Face Example Creates Curve 1 using the Manifold/2 Point option on a face of Solid 1 that is between Points 5 and 12. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

6

Before:

**Method: Manifold Curve ID List
**

1

12 9 1 1 10 8 Y X 5 Z 7

Option: Manifold Parameters... Option: 2 Point

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1.5

11

**Starting Point List
**

Point 5

**Ending Point List
**

Point 12

After:

6

-Apply9 1

12 7 1 1 10 8 Y X 5 Z

11

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 164

Options

Close

**Manifold Curves onto a Surface With the N-Points Option
**

The Manifold/N-Points option creates curves directly on a set of surfaces or solid faces by using two or more point locations on the surface. The point locations must lie on the surface or face and they can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Manifold Curve ID List
**

4

Option: Manifold Parameters... Option: N-Points Surface

Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. When the Manifold Parameters... button is pressed, the Manifold Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 167) for more information.

Point List

Specify in Surface List, the existing surfaces or faces that you want to create curves on, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Surface Select menu. Examples: Surface 1 10, Solid 5.2. Specify in Point List the existing point locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Point 10, Surface 5.2.1, Solid 10.3.2.1. The Surface Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces or faces.

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 165

Options

Close

Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on Surface 1 through Points 5, 8, 17, 18 and 4. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

5 8

Before:

**Method: Manifold Curve ID List
**

1 6

17 1 18 4

**Option: Manifold Parameters... Option: N-Points Surface
**

Surface 1 Z

7 Y X

Point List

Point 5 8 17 18 4

-Apply-

After:

5 8 6 17 1 1 18 4 7 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 166

Options

Close

Curve Manifold Method With N-Points Option On a Face Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Manifold/N-Points option. The curve is created on the top face of Solid 1, through Points 6, 12, 13 and 5. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

6

Before:

**Method: Manifold Curve ID List
**

9 1 1 1 13 12 7

**Option: Manifold Parameters... Option: N-Points Surface
**

Solid 1.5 Y X Z 8

10 5

Point List

Point 6 12 13 5

11

-Apply-

After:

6

12 9 1 1 1 13 7

10 8 5

Y X

Z 11

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 167

Options

Close

**Manifold Parameters Subordinate Form
**

The Manifold Parameters subordinate form appears when the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is ON and the Manifold Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Manifold application form.

**Manifold Parameters Curves per Manifold
**

0 Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create between each pair of points (for the 2 Point option) or through a set of given points (for the N-Points option). Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the manifold using a tolerance based cubic spline.

Manifold Tolerance

0.005

OK

**Cancel More Help:
**

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 168

Options

Close

**Creating Curves Normally Between a Point and a Curve (Normal Method)
**

The Normal method creates straight parametric cubic curves from a point location, normally to a curve or an edge. The point location can be points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Normal
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

Auto Execute

Point List Specify in Point List, the existing point locations, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor defining them using the Point Select menu. Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 5.2. Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting them. Examples: Curve 10, Solid 5.2.1. The Curve Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges.

Curve List

-Apply-

Point

New Curve Original Curve

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 169

Options

Close

Curve Normal Method Example Creates Curve 6 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 13 normally to the edge of Curve 5. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Normal

13

Before:

Curve ID List

6 12

**Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 13

Curve List

Curve 5

5 Y Z X

-Apply-

After:

13 6 14 12

5 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 170

Options

Close

Curve Normal Method From An Edge Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Normal method. The curve is created from Point 20 normally to an edge of Surface 4 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Normal

16

Before:

17

Curve ID List

1

**Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 20

4

Curve List

Curve 4 Z

20 Y X 18 19

-Apply-

After:

17 16

4

20 Y 1 Z X 18 21 19

Curve Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 171

Options

Close

**Creating Offset Curves
**

Creating Constant Offset Curve

This form is used to create a constant offset curve. Geometry Geometry Action: Create Object: Method: Curve Offset

Specify the Offset Curve type to create: 1. Constant Offset 2. Variable Offset

Curve ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Offset Parameters Constant Offset Value
**

1.0 Specify the constant offset value of the curve. Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using the Repeat Count parameter. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves. Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from. Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from.

Repeat Count

1

Auto Execute Curve List

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 172

Options

Close

Creating Constant Offset Curve Example Create offset curves 2 thru 4 by offsetting a distance of .5 from curve 1 using a repeat count of 3. Geometry Geometry Action: Create Object: Method: Curve Offset

Before:

Curve ID List

2

1

**Offset Parameters Constant Offset Value
**

.5

Repeat Count

3

Y Z X

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1

After:

**Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction
**

4

Reset Graphics

3

-Apply1

2

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 173

Options

Close

**Creating Variable Offset Curve
**

This form is used to create a variable offset curve. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Offset

Specify the Offset Curve type to create: 1. Constant Offset 2. Variable Offset Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the start offset value of the curve.

Curve ID List

1

**Offset Parameters Start Value
**

1.0

Specify the end offset value of the curve. Specify the number of copies of the offset curve to create using the Repeat Count parameter. Specify the Parameterization Control of the offset curve. Parameter Value: Defines the parametric values of the start and end offset distances. Arc Length: Function of arc length. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the curve used to create an offset curve from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 10 11. The Curve select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves. Draws the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from. Reverses the direction vector of the curve to create the offset curve from.

End Value

1.0

Repeat Count

1

[Parameterization Control...] Auto Execute Curve List

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 174

Options

Close

**Parameterization Control for Variable Offset Curve
**

This form is used to define the parameterization control for the offset curve. There are two types; Arc Length and Parameter Value. Parameterization Control Arc Length Parameter Value 0.0 Start Parameter Value 0.0 End Parameter Value OK Cancel 1.0

1.0 Select the Parameterization Method for the offset curve. (Arc Length is Default )

1.0

0.0

Define the start and end Parameter Values for the start and end distance of the offset curve by using the slidebar or entering the value in the databox. The start Parameter Value must be less than the End Parameter Value. (Used for when the Parameterization Method is Parameter Value.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 175

Options

Close

Creating Variable Offset Curve Example Create curves 2 thru 3 from curve 1 by offsetting a start distance of .25 and an end distance of 1. Use parameter values of .5 and 1.0. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Offset

Before:

1

Curve ID List

2

**Offset Parameters Start Value
**

0.25

End Value

1.0

Y Z X

Repeat Count

1

After:

**[Parameterization Control...] Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1 3

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -ApplyY Z X

2

1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 176

Options

Close

**Projecting Curves Onto Surfaces
**

The Project method creates curves by projecting a set of curves or edges along a defined projection vector, onto a surface or solid face. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Project

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

**Option: Project Parameters... Option: Normal to Plane
**

If pressed, the Project Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Project Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 182) for more information.

Available options are:

Normal to Plane - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected through a vector that is normal to at least one of the curves or edges that define a plane. Normal to Surf - The curves or edges in Curve List will be projected through a vector that is normal to the surface or solid face specified in Surface List. Define Vector - The project direction is defined by the vector coordinates entered in the Projection Vector databox which is expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame. Example: <1 1 0>. The Vector Select menu will appear to allow you alternate ways to cursor define the vector definition. View Factor - The project direction is defined by the view angle in the current viewport. MSC.Patran will project the existing points using the normal direction of the screen.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 177

Options

Close

If ON, after Project completes, the existing curves specified in Curve List will be deleted from the database.

**Option: Normal to Plane Projection Vector
**

<0 0 0> Used if the Define Vector option is chosen. Either enter the vector coordinates that are expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame, or use the Vector Select Menu that appears to cursor define the projection vector.

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List

Specify in Curve List, the existing curves or edges that you want to project onto the surfaces or faces listed in Surface List. Specify in Surface List, the surfaces or faces that the curves or edges will be projected onto. You can either cursor select the existing entities or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: For curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10 Solid 5.1. The Curve Select menu and Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves or edges, and surfaces or faces.

Surface List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Viewing Menu (Ch. 5) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 178

Options

Close

Curve Project Method With the Normal to Plane Option Example Creates Curve 7 using the Create Project/Normal to Plane option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 that is normal to the plane defined by Curve 6. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Project

5 15 6 2 13

Before:

Curve ID List

7

**Option: Project Parameters... Option: Normal to Plane Projection Vector
**

Y <0 0 0> Z

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

X

12 14

**Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 6

After:

13

Surface List

Surface 2 6

5 15 7

2

16

-Apply-

Y Z X 12 14

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 179

Options

Close

Curve Project Method With the Normal to Surf Option Example Creates Curve 8 using the Create/Project/Normal to Surf option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 normally onto Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Project

5 15 6 7 2 16

Before:

13

Curve ID List

8

**Option: Project Parameters... Option: Normal to Surf Projection Vector
**

Y <0 0 0> Z X

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

12 14

**Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 6

After:

13

Surface List

Surface 2 7

5

2

16

17

-Apply-

8

Y Z X 12 14

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 180

Options

Close

Curve Project Method With Define Vector Option Example Creates Curve 7 with the Define Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 through the vector that is defined by Points 19 and 20 by using the Vector select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Project

2 19 6 20

Before:

13

Curve ID List

7

**Option: Project Parameters... Option: Define Vector Projection Vector
**

Construct2PointVector Y Z

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

X 12 14

**Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 6

After:

13

Surface List

Surface 2 19 7

2 20 21

-Apply-

Y Z X 12 14

Vector Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 181

Options

Close

Curve Project Method With View Vector Option Example Creates Curve 7 with the View Vector option. The curve is projected from Curve 6 onto Surface 2 through the view angle of the current viewport. Notice that Delete Original Curves is pressed and Curve 6 is deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Project

2 6

Before:

13

Curve ID List

7

Option: Project Parameters... Option: View Vector

Projection Vector

Construct2PointVector Y Z 12 X 14

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Delete Original Curves Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 6

After:

13

Surface List

Surface 2 7 15

2

-Apply-

Y Z X 12 14

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 182

Options

Close

**Project Parameters Subordinate Form
**

The Project Parameters subordinate form appears when the Project Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve/Project application form. Project Parameters Curves per Projection

0 Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on the Create/Curve/Project form. If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create for a given projection location.

Projection Tolerance

0.005

OK

Cancel

Used by MSC.Patran to approximate the curve projection location using a tolerance based cubic spline.

More Help:

• Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 183

Options

Close

**Creating Piecewise Linear Curves
**

The PWL method will create a set of piecewise linear (or straight) parametric cubic curves between a set of existing point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve PWL

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1 Point List

-Apply-

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to connect the curves between, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point locations.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 184

Options

Close

Curve PWL Method Example Creates seven curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/PWL method. The straight curves are created through Points 12 through 18 and Node 1.

Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve PWL

Before:

13 14 17 18

15

Curve ID List

5

16

Point List

Point 12: 18 Node 1

12

1

Y

-ApplyZ X

After:

13 6 14 7 15 5 8 17 9 16 11 10 18

12

19 1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 185

Options

Close

**Creating Spline Curves
**

Creating Spline Curves with the Loft Spline Option

The Spline method using the Loft Spline option creates piecewise cubic polynomial spline curves that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Spline

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

**Option: Loft Spline Curves per Spline
**

0 Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.

**End Point Slope Control Auto Execute
**

If ON, End Point Slope Control allows you to use the Start and End Point Tangent Vector databoxes to define the tangent vector for the slopes at the spline’s start point and end point locations.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 186

Options

Close

End Point Slope Control Auto Execute Start Point Tangent Vector

Used if End Point Slope Control toggle is ON. Specify in Start Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of the slope at the first point listed in Point List. Specify in End Point Tangent Vector, the vector definition of the slope at the last point listed in Point List. You can either enter the vector coordinates that are expressed in the global rectangular frame, Coord 0 (Example: <1.5 0 0>); or you can use the Vector Select menu that appears to cursor define the slope’s vector.

End Point Tangent Vector

Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point locations.

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 187

Options

Close

Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/Spline method with the Loft Spline option. The curve is created through Points 1 through 5. Notice that since End Point Slope Control are not pressed in, Start and End Point Tangent Vector are disabled. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Spline

1

Before:

2

Curve ID List

1

3

**Option: Loft Spline Curves per Spline
**

0 Y Z X 4

5

End Point Slope Control Auto Execute Start Point Tangent Vector

End Point Tangent Vector

After:

2 1

Point List

Point 1:5 3 1

-Apply-

5

4 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 188

Options

Close

Curve Spline Method With Loft Spline Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Curve 2 is created with End Point Slope Control is pressed in. The Start Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 1 and 2, and the End Point Tangent Vector is defined by Points 4 and 5, using the Vector select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

1 1

Before:

2 1

Create Curve Spline

Curve ID List

3

**Option: Loft Spline Curves per Spline
**

0 4

5

**End Point Slope Control Auto Execute Start Point Tangent Vector
**

Construct 2PointVector

Y Z X

**End Point Tangent Vector
**

Construct 2PointVector

After:

2 1

Point List

Point 1:5

3

-Apply2 1 5

4 Y Z X

Vector Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 189

Options

Close

**Creating Spline Curves with the B-Spline Option
**

The Spline/B-Spline option creates spline curves that pass through at least three point locations. MSC.Patran processes the slope continually between the point segments. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Spline

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Curve ID List

1

**Option: B-Spline Curves per Spline B-Spline Parameters 2 Order Interpolation Closed
**

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the spline.

10

Specify for Order, the B-Spline’s order of the polynomials. As Order increases, MSC.Patran will create an increasingly smoother spline. MSC.Patran will not create the spline if Order is greater than the number of points listed in Point List. If Interpolation is ON, MSC.Patran will force the spline through the given points. If it is OFF, the spline will only pass through the first and last points. If Closed is ON, MSC.Patran will created a closed spline. If it is OFF, the spline will be open ended. If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the B-spline is based on the chord length distances relative to the locations of the spline’s interior points. This means the curve may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior points are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points along the B-spline will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the specified points in the Point List are located. That is, the curve will be always uniformly parameterized.

Parametrization Method x Chord Length x Uniform x Point List

-Apply-

More Help:

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations to define the spline, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point locations. Examples: Point 1:10, Surface 10.1 12.2. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point locations. • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Geometry Preferences (p. 296) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 190

Options

Close

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example Creates Curve 1 with the B-Spline option. The B-spline has an order of 3 and uses Points 1 through 5. Since Interpolation is not pressed, the curve is not forced to pass through all the points. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Spline

1 2

Before:

Curve ID List

1

3

**Option: B-Spline Curves per Spline
**

0 4 Y

5

**B-Spline Parameters 3 Order Interpolation Closed Parametrization Method x Chord Length x Uniform x Point List
**

Point 1:5

10

Z X

After:

2 1

3 1 5

-ApplyY Z X

4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 191

Options

Close

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that the order for Curve 2 is three, instead of five. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Spline

1 2

Before:

Curve ID List

2 3 1

**Option: B-Spline Curves per Spline
**

0 4

5

**B-Spline Parameters 5 Order Interpolation Closed Parametrization Method x Chord Length x Uniform x Point List
**

Point 1:5

10

Y Z X

After:

2 1

3 1 5

-Apply4 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 192

Options

Close

Curve Spline Method With B-Spline Option Example This example is the same as the previous example, except Interpolation is pressed and Curve 3 is forced to pass through Points 1 through 5. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Spline

1 2

Before:

Curve ID List

3 3 1

**Option: B-Spline Curves per Spline
**

0 4

5

**B-Spline Parameters 5 Order Interpolation Closed Parametrization Method x Chord Length x Uniform x Point List
**

Point 1:5

10

Y Z X

After:

2 1

3 1 5

-Apply4 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 193

Options

Close

**Creating Curves Tangent Between Two Curves (TanCurve Method)
**

The TanCurve method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between two existing curves or edges. The curves or edges cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be able to find the tangent location on each curve. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: TanCurve Curve ID List
**

1

**Trim Original Curves Auto Execute
**

Curve/Point 1 List

If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve/Point 1 and 2 Lists. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the original curve. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve/Point 2 List

Specify in Curve/Point 1 List and Curve/Point 2 List, the pair of curves or edges, along with their endpoints that the new curve will be created between. For each listbox, the Curve Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate curves or edges, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate endpoint locations.

-Apply-

New Curve Original Curve 1

Portions To Be Trimmed Original Curve 2

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 194

Options

Close

Curve TanCurve Method Example Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanCurve method. The curve is tangent between Curves 9 and 8 with Points 26 and 25 as the endpoints selected in the Point 1 and 2 Lists. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed.

Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method: TanCurve Curve ID List
**

10 9

8

**Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Curve/Point 1 List
**

ConstructPoint CurveUOn Curve 26 Y Z X 28

23

25

**Curve/Point 2 List
**

ConstructPoint CurveUOnCurve

-Apply-

After:

29 9

10

30 8

23

25

26 Y Z X

28

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 195

Options

Close

**Creating Curves Tangent Between Curves and Points (TanPoint Method)
**

The TanPoint method creates straight parametric cubic curves that are tangent between a point location and a curve or an edge. The curve or edge cannot be straight, or else MSC.Patran will not be able to find the tangent location. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: TanPoint Curve ID List
**

1

**Closest Tangent Only Trim Original Curves Auto Execute
**

Point List

If Closest Tangent Only is chosen, the new curve will be created at the closest tangent point to the existing point location. If All Tangents is chosen, MSC.Patran will preview each curve to be created at all possible tangent points and ask if you want to create a curve at each possible location. If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the curves listed in the Curve List. Each curve is trimmed from the tangent point to the end of the original curve.

Curve List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 196

Options

Close

**Closest Tangent Only Trim Original Curves Auto Execute
**

Point List Specify in Point List, the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (Examples: Point 1 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or by cursor selecting the location using the Point Select menu. Specify in Curve List, the curves or edges either by entering the IDs or by cursor selecting them using the Curve Select menu. Examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Curve List

-Apply-

**New Curve Original Curve
**

Point

Portion to trim

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 197

Options

Close

Curve TanPoint Method Example Creates Curve 10 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 25 and Curve 9. Notice that Trim Original Curves is pressed in and Curve 9 is trimmed. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

9

Before:

**Method: TanPoint Curve ID List
**

10

25

**Closest Tangent Only Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 25

26 Y Z X

28

Curve List

Curve 9

After:

-Apply29 9 10 25

26 Y Z X

28

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 198

Options

Close

Curve TanPoint Method Example Creates Curve 1 using the Create/TanPoint method. The curve is tangent between Point 9 and an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

1 1

Before:

**Method: TanPoint Curve ID List
**

1 5

2

**Closest Tangent Only Trim Original Curves Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 9 Z Y 6 X 9

Curve List

Curve 1.2

After:

-Apply1

1 10

5

2 1

9 Y Z 6 X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 199

Options

Close

**Creating Curves, Surfaces and Solids Through a Vector Length (XYZ Method)
**

The XYZ method creates parametric cubic curves, surface, or solids from a specified vector length and origin. The origin can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

<Type> ID 1

Create

<Type> Set <Type> to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.

XYZ List

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve, surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0. Enter the vector coordinates to define the lengths and direction for the new curves, surfaces or solids. Enter the coordinates either from the keyboard (example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define the vector using the Vector Select menu that appears. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the origin or starting point location of the new curve, surface or solid. You can express the origin’s point location either by entering the cartesian coordinates from the keyboard, or by using the Point Select menu to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations. Examples: [ 10 0 0], Surface 10.1.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.3.1.

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Vector Coordinates List <1 0 0>

Auto Execute

Origin Coordinates List [0 0 0]

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 200

Options

Close

Curve XYZ Method Example Creates Curve 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 0>. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve XYZ

Before:

Curve ID List

3

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

6

**Vector Coordinates List
**

<20 10 0> Y

**Auto Execute Origin Coordinates List
**

Point 6

Z

X

After:

-Apply-

7

3

6

Y

Z

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 201

Options

Close

Surface XYZ Method Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/XYZ method, whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 5>. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface XYZ

Before:

Surface ID List

3

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

6

**Vector Coordinates List
**

<20 10 5>

Y

**Auto Execute Origin Coordinates List
**

Point 6

Z

X

After:

-Apply7

8 3 6

Y Z X 9

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 202

Options

Close

Solid XYZ Method Example Creates Solid 1 whose origin is located at Point 6 and whose vector orientation and length is <20 10 5> which is expressed within the Reference Coordinate Frame, Coord 0.

Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid XYZ

Before:

Solid ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

6

**Vector Coordinates List
**

<20 10 5>

Y

**Auto Execute Origin Coordinates List
**

Point 6

Z

X

After:

-Apply11 7

8 1 12

6 10

Y 9 Z X 13

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 203

Options

Close

**Creating Involute Curves
**

Creating Involute Curves with the Angles Option

The Involute/Angles option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended for gear designers, the Angles option requires the angle of the unwinding and the starting angle. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Involute Curve ID List
**

1

**Option: Angles Involute Parameters Angle to unwind the involute
**

0.0

**Starting angle for involute
**

0.0

Specify in Angle to unwind the involute, the angle in degrees to unwind the involute. Specify in Starting angle for involute, the starting angle in degrees of the involute curve. Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the total involute. This is only used in conjunction with the Patran 2 Convention.

**Curves per Point
**

1 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Involute Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane the involute curve will be in. Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu and cursor define the vector definition.

Auto Execute

Point List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 204

Options

Close

**Involute Parameters Angle to unwind the involute
**

0.0

**Starting angle for involute
**

0.0

**Curves per Point
**

1 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Involute Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Point List Specify the existing point, vertex, node or other point location that defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point location.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 205

Options

Close

Curve Involute Method With the Angles Option Example Creates four curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Angles option, where the curve is unwound 360 degrees about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, from Point 13. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method: Involute Curve ID List
**

5 13

**Option: Angles Involute Parameters Angle to unwind the involute
**

360

**Starting angle for involute
**

0.0

Y Z X

**Curves per Point
**

4

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

After:

15 7 6 14 5 13 16

Involute Axis

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

**Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 13

-Apply-

Y Z X

8

17

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 206

Options

Close

**Creating Involute Curves with the Radii Option
**

The Involute/Radii option creates parametric cubic curves from a point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point location provided on the Point select menu. Involute curves are like the unwinding of an imaginary string from a circular bobbin. Intended for the material modeling community, the Radii option requires the base radius of the bobbin and the radius of the stop of the curve. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

**Method: Involute Curve ID List
**

1

**Option: Radii Involute Parameters Base radius of the bobbin
**

0.0 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Radius of the stop
**

0.0

**Curves per Point
**

1 Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Involute Axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Specify in Base radius of the bobbin, the base radius, in model units, of the bobbin. Specify in Radius of the Stop, the radius of the stop of the involute curve. Specify in Curves per Point, how many curves will compose the total involute.

Define in Involute Axis, a vector that is perpendicular to the plane the involute curve will be in. Either enter the vector coordinates that will be expressed in the Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example: {[0 0 0][1 0 0]. Or, use the Vector Select menu and cursor define the vector definition. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Point List

-ApplySpecify the point, vertex, node or other point location that defines the starting point of the involute, either by entering the ID from the keyboard or by cursor selecting the point location. Examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point location.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 207

Options

Close

Curve Involute Method With the Radii Option Example Creates six curves starting with Curve 5 using the Create/Involute/Radii option, where the curve is unwound starting with a base radius of 0.1 and a stop radius of 2, about the involute axis {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}, starting from Point 13. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method: Involute Curve ID List
**

5 13

**Option: Radii Involute Parameters Base radius of the bobbin
**

0.1

**Radius of the stop
**

2

Y Z X

**Curves per Point
**

6

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

After:

18 9 14

Involute Axis

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

**Auto Execute Point List
**

10 Point 13 13 15 6 5 17

-Apply-

Y Z 19 X 7 16

8

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 208

Options

Close

**Revolving Curves, Surfaces and Solids
**

The Revolve method creates curves, surfaces or solids by the rotation of a point, curve or surface location, respectively. The new geometric entity is rotated about a defined axis. Point locations can be points, vertices, or nodes, Curve locations can be curves or edges. Surface locations can be surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action: Object: Method:

<Type> ID 1

**Create <Type> Revolve List
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next entity type to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Set <Type> to either: Curve, Surface or Solid.

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0 Specify in Axis, the coordinate values of the rotation vector that will be expressed within the Refer. Coordinate Frame (default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0). Example: {[10 0 0][10 0 1]}. You can instead use the Vector Select menu that appears, to cursor define the rotation vector in the Axis databox.

Axis

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

**Revolve Parameters Total Angle
**

90.0

Offset Angle

0.0 <Type> 1

Specify in Total Angle, the total positive or negative rotation angle, in degrees, using “right-hand” rule. Specify in Offset Angle, an optional offset angle in degrees. (Default is no offset.) If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify in <Type> per <Type>, the number of curves, surfaces or solids to create within the specified Total Angle. Otherwise if PATRAN 2 Convention is OFF, <Type> per <Type> is disabled. Specify the points, curves or surfaces either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 5 10, Curve 10, Surface 1:10. The Select menu that appears at the bottom can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, curves, edges, faces or solids.

per <Type>

Auto Execute <Type> List

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 209

Options

Close

Curve Revolve Method Example Creates Curves 5 and 6 using the Create/Revolve method, where the curves are created from Points 12 and 13 about the axis, {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} for 180 degrees, with an offset of 30 degrees. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Curve Revolve

Before:

Curve ID List

5 12 13

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Axis

Y {[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Z X

**Revolve Parameters Total Angle
**

180.0

Offset Angle

30.0

After:

**Curves per Point
**

1 6

**Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 12 13 14 5 16

-Apply12 13

Y Z 17 X

15

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 210

Options

Close

Surface Revolve Method Example Creates Surface 1 where the surface is created from a curve defined by Points 1 and 2 using the Curve select menu icon listed below. The surface is revolved 45 degrees about the axis {Point 1 [x1 y1 1]}. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Revolve

Before:

Surface ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0 1 2

Axis

Y {Point 1 [x1 y1 1]} Z X

**Sweep Parameters Total Angle
**

45.0

Offset Angle

0.0

After:

**Surfaces per Curve
**

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Construct 2 Point Curve 1 1 Y Z X

3

-Apply-

2

Curve Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 211

Options

Close

Surface Revolve Method Example Creates four surfaces starting with Surface 2 using the Create/Revolve method, where the surfaces are created from Curves 9 through 12 about the axis, {[0 0 0 ] [ 1 0 0 ]} for 360 degrees. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Revolve

12 20 11 19 10 17 9 18 21

Before:

Surface ID List

2

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Axis

{Point 1 [x1 y1 1]} Y

**Sweep Parameters Total Angle
**

360.0

Z

X

Offset Angle

0.0

After:

21 12 20 11

**Surfaces per Curve
**

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 9:12 10 18 17 9

19

-ApplyY X Z 2 3 4 5

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 212

Options

Close

Solid Revolve Method Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 2. The axis is defined by the Points 15 and 12 using the Axis select menu icon listed below, for a rotation of 90 degrees. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Revolve

13 14

Before:

Solid ID List

1 2

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Axis

Construct2PointAxis 12

Y 15 Z X

**Sweep Parameters Total Angle
**

90.0

Offset Angle

0.0

After:

14 13

**Solids per Surface
**

1

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 2 2 1 16

-Apply17 Y X Z 12

15

Axis Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 213

Options

Close

Solid Revolve Method Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Revolve method, where the solid is created from Surface 1 about the X axis of Coord 1 (by using the Axis select menu listed below) for 90 degrees. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Revolve

1 4 3 1

Before:

2

Solid ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Axis

Coord 1.1 Y X Z Y 1 Z X

**Sweep Parameters Total Angle
**

90.0

Offset Angle

0.0

After:

2 3 1

**Solids per Surface
**

1

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

1 4 1

-ApplyY 5 6 Z X 7 8 Z

Y 1 X

**Axis Select Menu Icon
**

1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 214

Options

Close

**Creating Orthogonal Curves (2D Normal Method)
**

Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Input Length Option

The 2D Normal/Input Length option creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to a curve or an edge. The curve is defined from a specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List
**

1

**Curve Length x Input Length x Calculate Length x
**

0.0 If Input Length is ON, enter the length of the new curve, in model units. See Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option (p. 218) for information on the Calculate Length button.

**x Distance Deltay x x x x Deltaic x Deltaz x Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Enter in Construction Plane List, either the coordinate values of a vector that is normal to the 2D plane that the new curve will lie in (example: {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}); or cursor define the vector using the Vector Select menu.

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List Curve List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 215

Options

Close

**Construction Plane List
**

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List Curve List

If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve length and the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity.

Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point location the curve will be created from. Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will be perpendicular to. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the locations.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 216

Options

Close

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option, where the curve is 1 unit long; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; it is perpendicular to the top edge of Surface 1; and its starting point is near Point 3. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

3 Z X 1 Y

Before:

2

**Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List
**

1

**Curve Length x Input Length x Calculate Length x
**

1.0

**x Distance Deltay x x x Deltaz x Deltax x x Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Cord 3.3

Y Z X 4 1

After:

**Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 3

2 3 Z 6 1 5 1 X Y

Curve List

Surface 1.4

-ApplyY 4 Z X 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 217

Options

Close

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option This example is the same as the previous example, except that Flip Curve Direction is pressed. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

3 Z X 1 Y

Before:

2

**Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List
**

1

**Curve Length x Input Length x Calculate Length x
**

0.0

**x Distance Deltay x x x Deltax x Deltaz x x Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Cord 3.3

Y Z X 4 1

After:

2 3 Z 5 X 1 Y 6

**Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 3

1

Curve List

Surface 1.4

-ApplyY Z X 4 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 218

Options

Close

**Creating Orthogonal Curves with the Calculate Length Option
**

The 2D Normal/Calculate Length option, creates straight parametric cubic curves that lie on a defined 2D plane and is perpendicular to an existing curve or edge. The curve is defined from specified point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

**Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List
**

4 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Curve Length x Input Length x x Calculate Length
**

0.0

If Calculate Length is ON, a small subordinate form called Length Calculation Points will appear (shown below). You must enter the point locations in the Point 1 and 2 databoxes shown below that the curve will be created between. Press Calculate Curve Length first to update the curve length displayed in the databox above, before you complete the remainder of the form (if Auto Execute is ON), or before you press the Apply button.

**x Distance Deltay x x x Deltaz x Deltax x x Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

Length Calculation Points Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List Curve List Auto Execute Point 1

Point 2

-Apply-

Length Calculation Points Subordinate Form

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 219

Options

Close

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

**x Distance Deltay x x x Deltaz x Deltax x x Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Default

Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List Curve List

If Flip Curve Direction is ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the new curve’s parametric ξ1 direction, relative to the curve length and the normal direction of the construction plane. The ξ1 direction is defined by the curve’s connectivity. Enter in Point List, the point, vertex, node or other point location the curve will be created from. Enter in Curve List, the curve or edge that the new curve will be perpendicular to.

-Apply-

Either enter the IDs from the keyboard or use the Point Select menu and the Curve Select menu to cursor define the locations.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 220

Options

Close

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Input Length Option Example Creates Curve 1 with the Input Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is 1.0; it lies within the plane whose normal is the global coordinate frame’s X axis, Coord 0.1; and it is starts from a point that is closest to Point 6. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

1 1

Before:

**Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List
**

1

**Curve Length x Input Length x x Calculate Length
**

0.0

2 5

**x Distance Deltay x x x x Deltax x Deltaz x Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.1 Z

Y 6 X

After:

8

**Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 6 1 1 1 2 5

Curve List

Surface 1.3

-Apply7 Y 6 Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 221

Options

Close

Curve 2D Normal Method With the Calculate Length Option Example Creates Curve 1 with the Calculate Length option. The distance of Curve 1 is the distance between Points 3 and 4; it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 3; and it starts from a point that is closest to Point 3. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

3 Z 3 X 1 Y

Before:

2

**Method: 2D Normal Curve ID List
**

1

**Curve Length x Input Length x x Calculate Length
**

1.41421

**x Distance Deltay x x x x Deltax x Deltaz x Calculate Curve Length Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Cord 3.3

Y Z X 4 1

After:

**Flip Curve Direction Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 3 6 1 2 3 Z 3 X 1 Y

Curve List

Surface 1.4

5

-ApplyY Z X 4

1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 222

Options

Close

**Creating 2D Circle Curves
**

The 2D Circle method creates circular curves of a specified radius that is within a defined 2D plane, based on a center point location. The point location can be a point, vertex, node or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

**Method: 2D Circle Curve ID List
**

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the circle.

**Curves per Circle
**

4

Circle Radius x Input Radius x Calculate Radius x

If Input Radius is ON, enter the value of the circle’s radius in model units. If Calculate Radius is ON, specify the point location in Radius Point List that the radius will be measured to, from the specified center point. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (example: Point 10, Surface 3.1.1, Node 30); or cursor select the point, vertex, node or other point location using the Point Select menu.

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 223

Options

Close

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default

Circle Radius x Input Radius x Calculate Radius x

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

-Apply-

Specify the point location that defines the center of the circle, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 1, Surface 10.1 Node 20); or by cursor selecting the location. The Point Select menu can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate point location.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 224

Options

Close

Curve 2D Circle Method With the Input Radius Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle method with the Input Radius option, where the circle has a radius of 1.0, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of Coord 0. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

1

Before:

**Method: 2D Circle Curve ID List
**

5

**Curves per Circle
**

4

**Circle Radius x Input Radius x Calculate Radius x
**

1.0

Y

Z

X

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Cord 0.3

After:

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

Node 1 12

-Apply-

1

5 Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 225

Options

Close

Curve 2D Circle Method With the Calculate Radius Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Circle/Calculate Radius option, where the radius is measured from Point 12 to Node 1, its center point is at Node 1, and it lies within the plane whose normal is the Z axis of the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method: 2D Circle Curve ID List
**

5

**Curves per Circle
**

4

1

12

**Circle Radius x Input Radius x x Calculate Radius
**

Y Z X

**Radius Point List
**

Point 12

After:

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Cord 0.3

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

Node 1 5 1 12

-ApplyY Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 226

Options

Close

**Creating 2D ArcAngle Curves
**

The 2D ArcAngles method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. The Arc parameter inputs are Radius, Start Angle and End Angle. The point location for the arc’s center is to be input. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

**Method: 2D ArcAngles Curve ID List
**

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Curves per Arc
**

1

**Arc Parameters Radius
**

1.0

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.

Start Angle

0.0 Enter the Arc parameters defined as Radius, Start Angle and End Angle (degrees).

End Angle

360.0

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the input point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the input point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 227

Options

Close

**Arc Parameters Radius
**

1.0

Start Angle

0.0

End Angle

360.0

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

-Apply-

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s center point, by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 228

Options

Close

Curve 2D ArcAngle Method Example Creates Curve 1 using Create/Curve/2D ArcAngles. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method: 2D ArcAngles Curve ID List
**

1

**Curves per Arc
**

1

**Arc Parameters Radius
**

1.0

Y Z X

Start Angle

0.0

End Angle

160.0

After:

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

1

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

2

Y

-Apply-

Z

X

1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 229

Options

Close

**Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc2Point Method)
**

Creating Arced Curves with the Center Option

The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: 2D Arc2Point Curve ID List
**

1

**Option: Center Arc2Point Parameters...
**

Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius. (Center parameters are displayed.)

If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p. ?) for more information.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 230

Options

Close

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3 The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Auto Execute Center Point List

Default

**Starting Point List
**

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s center and arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu.

Ending Point List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 231

Options

Close

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Min. Angle Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Minimum Angle is chosen; the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

1

Before:

**Method: 2D Arc2Point Curve ID List
**

5

**Option: Center Arc2Point Parameters... Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Y Z X 12 13

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

Point 12

After:

5 1 14

**Starting Point List
**

Point 13

**Ending Point List
**

Node 1

-Apply-

12

13

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 232

Options

Close

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method With Center Max. Angle Option Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc2Point method, where the Maximum Angle is chosen; the arced curve is between Point 13 and Node 1; its center point is Point 12; and the curve lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

1

Before:

**Method: 2D Arc2Point Curve ID List
**

5

**Option: Center Arc2Point Parameters... Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Z X Y 12 13

**Auto Execut e Center Point List
**

Point 12

After:

1 14

**Starting Point List
**

Point 13

**Ending Point List
**

Node 1 12 13

-Apply-

Y Z X 5

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 233

Options

Close

**Creating Arced Curves with the Radius Option
**

The 2D Arc2Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane. Two options are provided. The Center option inputs are point locations for the arc’s center and the arc’s starting and ending points. The Radius option inputs are the radius and point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: 2D Arc2Point Curve ID List
**

1

**Option: Radius Arc2Point Parameters... Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

Option Menu to select between Options Center and Radius. (Center parameters are displayed.)

If pressed, the Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form will appear. See Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form (p. 236) for more information.

Arc Radius

1.0

Create Center Point Flip Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List Ending Point List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 234

Options

Close

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3 The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate.

Arc Radius

1.0

Default

Create Center Point Flip Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List Ending Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s starting and ending points, by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20. Or cursor define the point locations using the Point Select menu. If Create Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be created. If Flip Center Point is ON, the arc center point will be flipped to create arc.

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 235

Options

Close

Curve 2D Arc2Point Method with Radius Option Example Creates Curve 1 by creating an arc with a radius of 1.5 using [-1 -.5 -1] and [1 1 1] as start/end points and in the Z construction plane. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Before:

**Method:2D Arc2Point Curve ID List
**

1

**Option: Radius Arc2Point Parameters... Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]}

Y Z X

Arc Radius

1.5

**Create Center Point Flip Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

[-1 -.5 -1]

After:

2

**Ending Point List
**

[1 1 1]

1

-Apply-

1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 236

Options

Close

**Arc2Point Parameters Subordinate Form
**

The Arc2Point Parameters subordinate form appears when the Arc2Point Parameters button is pressed on the Create/Curve 2D Arc2Point application form. Arc2Point Parameters Curves per Arc

1

Disabled if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF on the Create/Curve/2D Arc2Point form. If PATRAN 2 Convention is ON, specify the number of parametric cubic curves to create per Arc.

**Arc Angle: Minimum Angle
**

If Minimum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc based on the smallest angle possible between the specified starting and ending points. If Maximum Angle is ON, MSC.Patran will create the arc based on the largest angle possible between the specified starting and ending points.

OK

Cancel

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 237

Options

Close

**Creating Arced Curves in a Plane (2D Arc3Point Method)
**

The 2D Arc3Point method creates arced curves within a defined 2D plane, based on point locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next curve to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: 2D Arc3Point Curve ID List
**

1

**Curves per Arc
**

1

Used if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. Specify the number of parametric cubic curves to compose the arc.

Project to Plane

If the Project to Plane toggle is ON, then the center point, and thus the resulting curve, are projected directly onto the plane; otherwise, the plane is first translated out to the center point, and the projection is done with respect to that new plane, parallel to the original plane. This toggle simply indicates whether the working plane is the plane specified, or an offset of that plane, driven by the input point(s).

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 238

Options

Close

The default construction plane now comes from the global preferences. So, if unchanged by the user, the default is Coord 0.3. The Coord/Axis/Vector/Plane select menus also have a new entry to restore the databox value to the default coordinate frame/construction plane, whichever is appropriate. Default

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

Coord 0.3

Create Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List Middle Point List Ending Point List

Specify the points, vertices, nodes or other point locations for the arc’s starting, middle and ending points, by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Surface 10.1.1, Node 20); or cursor defining the point locations using the Point Select menu.

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

If ON, MSC.Patran will create a point at the calculated center of the arc.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 239

Options

Close

Curve 2D Arc3Point Method Example Creates Curve 5 using the Create/2D Arc3Point method. The arced curve is created through the Points 13, 14 and Node 1 and it lies within the plane whose normal is {[0 0 0][0 0 1]}. Notice that Create Center Point is pressed in and Point 16 is created. Geometry Action: Object: Create Curve

1 14

Before:

**Method: 2D Arc3Point Curve ID List
**

5

**Curves per Arc
**

1

**Project to Plane Construction Plane List
**

{[0 0 0][0 0 1]} Y Z X 13

**Create Center Point Auto Execute Starting Point List
**

Point 13

After:

14 5 15 1

**Middle Point List
**

Point 14

**Ending Point List
**

Node 1

-Apply-

Y Z X

16

13

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 240

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces from Curves
**

Creating Surfaces Between 2 Curves

The Curve method using the 2 Curve option creates surfaces between two curves or edges. Degenerate three-sided surfaces can be created. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41) for more information. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

**Option: 2 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Manifold Manifold Surface
**

Deactivated and not used for the 2 Curve option.

If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with the Surface Select menu.

Auto Execute

Starting Curve List

Ending Curve List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Specify in Starting and Ending Curve Lists, the curves or edges for the new surfaces, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 241

Options

Close

Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/2 Curve option. The curve is created between Curves 5 and 6. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

17

Before:

Surface ID List

2 12 6 5 18

**Option: 2 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform
**

Y

16 X

**Manifold Manifold Surface
**

Z

Auto Execute Starting Curve List Curve 5 Ending Curve List Curve 6

After:

17

12 5

2

6

-Apply-

18

Y Z X

16

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 242

Options

Close

Surface Curve Method With the 2 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 that is degenerate with the 2 Curve option which is between an edge of Surface 1 and a zero length curve defined by Point 5, twice. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

2 3

Before:

Surface ID List

2 1

**Option: 2 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Manifold Manifold Surface
**

1 Y Z X 4

5

**Auto Execute Starting Curve List
**

Surface 1.3

After:

**Ending Curve List
**

Construct 2 Point Curve

2

3

1

-Apply1 Y Z X 4

2

5

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 243

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces Through 3 Curves (Curve Method)
**

The Curve method using the 3 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through three existing curves or edges. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

**Option: 3 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Execute
**

Starting Curve List

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surface’s middle curve. This means the surface may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the middle curve is located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the middle curve is located. That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in the Starting, Middle and Ending Curve Lists, the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.

Middle Curve List

Ending Curve List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 244

Options

Close

Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/Curve option. The curve is created through Curves 5, 6 and 8. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

19 8 21 17 5 12 6 18 16 Y X

Before:

Surface ID List

2

**Option: 3 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Execute Starting Curve List
**

Curve 5 Z

**Middle Curve List
**

Curve 6

After:

**Ending Curve List
**

Curve 8

19 8 21

-Apply12

17 5 2 6 18 16 Y X

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 245

Options

Close

Surface Curve Method With 3 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 2 through Curves 2, 3 and an edge of Surface 1. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

8 2 1 9 6 1 Y Z X 7 5 1 10 3 11

Before:

Surface ID List

2

**Option: 3 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Execute Starting Curve List
**

Surface 1.4

**Middle Curve List
**

Curve 2

After:

10 3

**Ending Curve List
**

Curve 3

-Apply-

8 2 1 9 6 1 Y Z X 7 5 1

11

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 246

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces Through 4 Curves (Curve Method)
**

The Curve method using the 4 Curve option creates surfaces that pass through four existing curves or edges. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves. This means the surface may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Surface ID List

1

**Option: 4 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Execute
**

Starting Curve List

Second Curve List

Third Curve List Specify in the Starting, Second, Third and Ending Curve Lists, the curves or edges that the new surfaces will pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor defining the curve locations using the Curve Select menu.

Ending Curve List

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 247

Options

Close

Surface Curve Method With 4 Curve Option Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Curve/4 Curve option. The curve is created through Curves 5,6 and 8 and the edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

22 24 2 23 2

Before:

Surface ID List

3

**Option: 4 Curve Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Execute Starting Curve List
**

Curve 5 Z 17 12 Y X 5

19 8 21 6 18 16

**Second Curve List
**

Curve 6

After:

**Third Curve List
**

Curve 8 24

**Ending Curve List
**

22 Surface 2.4 2 23 2

-Apply17 12 Y X 5 16

19 8 3 6 18 21

Z

Curve Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 248

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces from N Curves (Curve Method)
**

The Curve method using the N-Curves option creates surfaces that pass through any number of curves or edges. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1 If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points that describe the surface is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surface’s second and third curves. This means the surface may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the interior curves are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points on the surface will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the interior curves are located. That is, the surface will be always uniformly parameterized. Specify in Curve List, two or more curves or edges that the surface will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 1:10, Surface 10.2 11.1, Solid 10.1.1 12.1.1), or cursor select the curves or edges using the Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.

Option: N-Curves Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Curve List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 249

Options

Close

Surface Curve Method With N-Curves Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Curve/N-Curves option. The curve is created through Curves 5,6,8,9 and 10. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Curve

19 8 17 21 6 18 16 Y X 22 9 23 24 10 25

Before:

Surface ID List

2

**Option: N-Curves Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Curve List
**

Curve 5 6 8:10

12

5

Z

-Apply-

After:

22 19 2 8 17 12 5 16 Y X 6 18 21 9

24 10 23 25

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 250

Options

Close

**Creating Composite Surfaces
**

Figure 4-1 The Composite method creates surfaces that are composed from multiple

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 251

Options surfaces.

Close

When toggled ON, uses all the boundary vertices from the Surface List. When toggled OFF, will enable vertex selection. If the Vertex List is left empty the original surface edges will be automatically merged until a slope change is encountered in the boundary. The slope change criteria is specified by the "NodeEdge Snap Angle" in the Finite Elements form under Preferences in the main menu. If vertices are specified, they will be graphically marked. This option is probably the most powerful as it will allow the mesher to ignore unimportant details on the boundary.

Geometry Action: Create

**Object: Surface Method: Composite Surface ID List
**

2 Allows the user to define larger surface regions within a model, typically when existing surfaces are too detailed for mesh creation. Composite surfaces may be meshed using a larger element edge length than supported on the more detailed, underlying surfaces. A composite surface is initially defined by selecting the existing surfaces to be combined. The surfaces will be graphically highlighted when picked or when the mouse focus is put on the surface list by picking in the listbox.

Delete Constituent Surfaces Surface List

Use All Edge Vertices Vertex List

Defines where geometric vertices, and subsequently finite element nodes are to be placed on the Composite Surface boundary. There are three Inner Loop Options: All will use all closed loops to identify the interior boundary of the composite surface.

Options... List Vertex

None will create a surface with no internal holes. Select will enable the user to identify existing interior holes to be part of the new surface. If the inner loop is defined by more than one edge, selection of any one of those will be enough. To add a hole which is not part of a surface, the Preview Boundary option must be used. In this case all curves have to be selected to identify the inner loop.

Inner Loop Option: All

Preview Boundary -Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

Highlights the current outer and inner boundary free edges and enables the Modify Boundary Frame.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 252

Options

Close

Appears either when the Preview Boundary option is selected or if the Composite Surface Builder was not able to identify a clean boundary from the Surface List. The free edges will be highlighted and marked as follows: White: Free edges within the Surface List. Dark Blue: Free edges shared by one other surface not in the Surface List. Cyan: Free edges shared by more than one surface not in the Surface List. Red: Free edges that have not been processed due to either a gap or a multiple branch path in the Surface List.

Options... Vertex

List

Add/Remove toggles allow edges or curves to be added or removed from the Surface List boundary. Add places selected curves and edges in the Edge List databox and also supports curve creation on-the-fly. Remove operates in Autoexecute mode whereby previously highlighted curves or edges are simply unhighlighted.

Modify Boundary: x Add x Edge List Surface 1.3 Reset -Applyx Remove

Reset can be used to start over again. If Surface List contains a previous used surface and the boundary has been modified, the previous modification list can be used again. Apply will initiate the Composite Surface Builder to use the Edge List in conjunction with the Surface List to build a new surface. If the proposed boundary is incorrect, the problem location will be marked and a message will appear.

General Comments If valid boundary loops are identified and any of the vertices in the vertex list are not part of a boundary, the location will be marked red and the user will be prompted to “ignore and continue” or “stop”. The Surface Builder always computes the optimal view plane based on the Surface List. In most cases this is satisfactory; however, in some instances, it can create a very distorted parametrization of the new surface, leading to poor finite element mesh quality. Sometimes the view selected by the user as “best” is more successful than the recommended optimal plane (i.e., answer “No” to the prompt asking permission to reorient the model to a better view); otherwise, the proposed Composite Surface will have to be represented by multiple composite surfaces. If the Composite Surface Builder often fails because of unresolved boundary edges, the gap and clean-up tolerances are most likely too small. If edges disappear the tolerances are probably too large. The default gap and clean-up tolerances are set equal to the global model tolerance and can be changed on the Options form.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 253

Options

Close

**Composite Surface Options
**

Used to create the boundary loops. This value has to be increased to automatically close existing gaps larger than the tolerance value.

Cleanup Tol.

0.005

Only used in the Surface Builder to ignore gaps between surface edges. Will zoom on the model location where the builder has detected a boundary gap or branch. This is useful for large Composite Surfaces. Controls the appearance of warning messages when gaps or branches are encountered. For the experienced user, they may rather not see the warning messages but simply rely on graphical feedback as previously described.

Gap Distance 0.005 Auto Zoom In Problem Detailed Information Display Auto Select Outer Boundary Erase Original Surfaces Ok Defaults

Erases (not deletes) the original surfaces upon successful construction of a Composite Surface. This is identical to using the Plot/Erase functionality under Display.

If toggled OFF, the user will be prompted to identify the outer boundary via a query process. This is needed if the default method of Auto Select fails.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 254

Options

Close

Surface Composite Method Example Creates Surface 2 from the surfaces in the viewport. Geometry Action: Create

Before:

**Object: Surface Method: Composite Surface ID List
**

2 Z 1 X Y

**Delete Constituent Surfaces Surface List Surface 1T#
**

Z X Y

Use All Edge Vertices Vertex List

After:

Options... Vertex

List All

Z 1 X Y

Inner Loop Option:

Preview Boundary -Apply-

Z Y X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 255

Options

Close

**Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces
**

The Decompose method creates four sided surfaces from an existing surface or solid face by choosing four vertex locations. This method is usually used to create surfaces from a multi-sided trimmed surface so that you can either mesh with IsoMesh or continue to build a tri-parametric solid. See Decomposing Trimmed Surfaces (p. 37) for more information on how to use the Decompose method. Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Decompose Surface ID List
**

1 Surface

Enter the trimmed surface to decompose either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Surface 10); or by cursor selecting the surface. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to chose the Apply button to execute the form. Enter in the Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices that will define the new surface. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select the vertices.

Auto Execute

Surface Vertex 1 List

Surface Vertex 2 List

Surface Vertex 3 List

Surface Vertex 4 List

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Trimmed Surfaces (p. 20) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 256

Options

Close

Surface Decompose Method Example Creates Surfaces 3, 4 and 5 using the Create/Decompose method. The surfaces are created from Trimmed Surface 2 and they are defined by the cursor selected vertices listed in the Surface Vertex databoxes on the form. Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Before:

17 15

**Method: Decompose Surface ID List
**

3 2 14

Surface Surface 2

Y 12

**Auto Execute Surface Vertex 1 List
**

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 1.0000

Z

X 18 16

**Surface Vertex 2 List
**

Surface 2(u 0.000000)(v 0.0000

After:

17 15

**Surface Vertex 3 List
**

Surface 2(u 0.516341)(v 0.0000 3

**Surface Vertex 4 List
**

Surface 2(u 0.331216)(v 1.0000 19 4 2 20

14

-Apply-

12 Y 5 Z X 18 16

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 257

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces from Edges (Edge Method)
**

The Edge method creates three or four sided surfaces that are bounded by three or four intersecting curves or edges, without manifolding the surface to an existing surface or face. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Edge

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1 Set this option to either 3 Edge or 4 Edge. The 3 Edge option will create a degenerate three sided surface. If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with the Surface Select menu. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Option: 4 Edge Manifold Manifold Surface

Auto Execute

Surface Edge 1 List

Surface Edge 2 List

Enter in the Surface Edge 1,2, 3 and/or 4 Lists, the three or four curves or edges that will bound the new surface, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.2, Solid 10.1.1); or by cursor selecting them with the Curve Select menu that appears on the bottom.

Surface Edge 3 List

Surface Edge 4 List

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 258

Options

Close

Surface Edge Method With the 3 Edge Option Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Edge/3 Edge option. The degenerate surface is created from Curves 5 and 6 and the edge of Surface 2. See Building a Degenerate Surface (Triangle) (p. 41). Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Edge

16 5 2 6 12 15 13 14

Before:

Surface ID List

3

**Option: 3 Edge Manifold Manifold Surface
**

Y Z X

**Auto Execute Surface Edge 1 List
**

Curve 5

After:

**Surface Edge 2 List
**

Curve 6 13 5 16 3 6 2 14

**Surface Edge 3 List
**

Surface 2.1

-Apply-

12

15

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 259

Options

Close

Surface Edge Method With the 4 Edge Option Example Creates Surface2 using the Create/Edge/4 Edge option. The surface is created from Curves 5 through 8. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Edge

12 5 18 7 6

Before:

Surface ID List

2

Option: 4 Edge

8

19 17 Y

**Manifold Manifold Surface
**

Z X

**Auto Execute Surface Edge 1 List
**

Curve 5

After:

**Surface Edge 2 List
**

Curve 6

**Surface Edge 3 List
**

7 Curve 7 12 5 2

18

6

**Surface Edge 4 List
**

Curve 8 19 8 17 Y Z X

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 260

Options

Close

Extracting Surfaces

Extracting Surfaces with the Parametric Option

The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them from within or on a solid, at a constant parametric ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ) , or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate location, where ξ 1 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 1 ≤ 1 , ξ 2 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 2 ≤ 1 , and ξ 3 has a range of 0 ≤ ξ 3 ≤ 1 . One surface is extracted from each solid. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Extract

Surface ID List

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Option: Parametric Surface Plane x Constant u Plane x Constant v Plane x x Constant w Plane x Surface Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

Select either Constant u Direction, Constant v Direction, or Constant w Direction. The surfaces will either be created either along the ξ 1 ( u ) direction for Constant u Direction; along the ξ 2 ( v ) direction for Constant v Direction; or along the ξ 3 (w) direction for Constant w Direction.

**u Parametric Value Auto Execute
**

Solid List

Specify the solid’s ξ 1 ( u ) , ξ 2 ( v ), or ξ 3 ( w ) coordinate value for the location of the surface, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of ξ 1 , ξ 2 and ξ 3 are defined by the connectivity of the solid. You can plot the parametric directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 261

Options

Close

**Surface Plane x Constant u Plane x Constant v Plane x x Constant w Plane x Surface Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

**u Parametric Value Auto Execute
**

Solid List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

-Apply-

Specify in Solid List, the solids that you want to extract surfaces from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 1:10), or cursor select the solids using the Solid Select menu that appears on the bottom.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 262

Options

Close

Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within Solid 1. Notice the parametric direction is displayed near Point 19. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Extract

2 19 1 3 22

Before:

20 21

Surface ID List

2 1

**Option: Parametric Surface Plane x Constant u Plane x x Constant v Plane x x Constant w Plane Surface Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.75 Y 12 Z X 16 17 18

After:

20 2 19 1 3 22 21

**w Parametric Value Auto Execute Solid List
**

Solid 1 1

-Apply23 Y 12 Z X 2 1 2

26 25

17 24 18 16

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 263

Options

Close

Surface Extract Method With the Parametric Option Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Extract/Parametric option. The surface is created at ξ 3 ( w ) = 0.75 within a solid that is defined by Surfaces 1 and 2 by using the Solid select menu icons listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Extract

7 2 9

Before:

10

Surface ID List

3

8

**Option: Parametric Surface Plane x Constant u Plane x x Constant v Plane x x Constant w Plane Surface Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.75 1 Y Z X

5

1

6

4

After:

10

**w Parametric Value Auto Execute Solid List
**

Construct 2SurfaceSolid (Eva 7

2

9

8 14

-Apply5 11 1 Y 3 6 12 13

1 X 4

Solid Select Menu Icons

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 264

Options

Close

**Extracting Surfaces with the Face Option
**

The Extract method creates surfaces by creating them on a specified solid face. One surface is extracted from each solid face. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Extract

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

Option:

Face By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Face List

-Apply-

Specify in Face List, the solid faces to create surfaces on, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Solid 10.2 11.1); or by cursor selecting the faces.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 265

Options

Close

Surface Extract Method With the Face Option Example Creates Surfaces 2 and 3 using the Create/Extract/Face option. The surface is created on two faces of Solid 10. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Extract

19 3 2 1 22

Before:

20 21

Surface ID List

2 1

Option:

Face

Y 12 Z X 16 17 18

**Auto Execute Face List
**

Solid 1.1 1.2

-Apply-

After:

20 2 1 19 1 3 2 22 3 1 2 2 1 21

Y 12 Z X

17 18 16

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 266

Options

Close

**Creating Fillet Surfaces
**

The Fillet method creates a parametric bi-cubic surface between two existing surfaces or solid faces. The existing surfaces or faces do not need to intersect. If they do intersect, the edges of the surfaces or faces must be aligned, and they must intersect so that a nondegenerate fillet can be created. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Fillet

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

**Fillet Parameters Fillet Radius 1 Fillet Radius 2 Fillet Tolerance
**

0.005

Fillet Radius 1 is the fillet radius. This is either a constant fillet radius (if Fillet Radius 2 is left blank) or part of a varying radius. Only one radius value is allowed for all pairs of surfaces or faces specified in Surface/Point 1 and 2 List. Fillet Radius 2 is optional. If a value is entered, MSC.Patran will create a fillet with a varying radius, with the first edge beginning at Radius 1 and gradually varying to Radius 2 at the opposite edge. Fillet Tolerance is used to control the accuracy of the fillet when MSC.Patran subdivides the geometry to calculate the fillet position. Decreasing the tolerance helps when the fillet is very small compared to the geometry model. Default is .005.

**Trim Original Surfaces Auto Execute
**

Surface/Point 1 List

Surface/Point 2 List

Points 1 and 2 Radius 1

Surface 2

Fillet Patch

-ApplySurface 1 Radius 2

Area To Be Trimmed

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 267

Options

Close

**Fillet Radius 1 Fillet Radius 2 Fillet Tolerance
**

0.005 If ON, MSC.Patran will trim the original surfaces specified in the Surface/Point 1 and 2 listboxes. Each surface is trimmed from the tangent point of the fillet to the end of the original surface. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Surface/Point 1 List and Surface/Point 2 List, the existing pair of surfaces or faces, along with their corner points that the fillet will be created between. For each listbox, the Surface Select menu and the Point Select menu will appear at the bottom to allow you to cursor define the appropriate surfaces or faces, and the points, vertices, nodes, or other appropriate corner point locations provided on the Point Select menu.

**Trim Original Surfaces Auto Execute
**

Surface/Point 1 List

Surface/Point 2 List

-Apply-

Points 1 and 2 Radius 1

Surface 2

Fillet Patch Area To Be Trimmed Radius 2

Surface 1

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 268

Options

Close

Surface Fillet Method Example Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 1 and 3 with the fillet’s endpoints, Points 2 and 10, cursor selected. Surface 4 has a varying fillet radius of 0.25 to 0.5. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Fillet

3 1 1 10 3 Y Z X 4 2

Before:

Surface ID List

4

**Fillet Parameters Fillet Radius 1
**

0.25

Fillet Radius 2

0.5

Fillet Tolerance

0.005

9

**Trim Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface/Point 1 List
**

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

After:

15

**Surface/Point 2 List
**

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu 14 1

1

-Apply10

11 4 3 Y

1

12 Z X 9

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 269

Options

Close

Surface Fillet Method Example Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Fillet method that is between Surfaces 3 and 4 with the fillet’s endpoints, Points 19 and 25, cursor selected. Surface 5 has a constant fillet radius of 0.75. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Fillet

20 4 25

Before:

24

Surface ID List

5

**Fillet Parameters Fillet Radius 1
**

0.75

16 18 5 Y 6 Z 17 X 19 3 23

**Fillet Radius 2 Fillet Tolerance
**

0.005

**Trim Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface/Point 1 List
**

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

After:

30

28

**Surface/Point 2 List
**

Construct PointSurfaceUVOnSu

4 31

-Apply18 Y

27

5

29

3 6 26 19

Z

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 270

Options

Close

**Matching Adjacent Surfaces
**

The Match method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces with common boundaries (or matched edges) from a pair of topologically incongruent surfaces or solid faces that have two consecutive common vertices but unmatched edges. The surface pair need not have matching parametric orientations. MSC.Patran requires geometry to be topologically congruent for IsoMesh and Paver to create coincident nodes at the common boundaries. See Topological Congruency and Meshing (p. 12) for more information. You can also match incongruent surfaces with the Edit action’s Edge Match method. See Matching Surface Edges (p. 481) for more information. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Match

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1 If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface 1 and 2 List from the database.

Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface 1 List

Surface 2 List

Specify in Surface 1 List, the surface or face to which the new surface will be matched. Specify in Surface 2 List, the surface or face to match with Surface 1. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them using the Surface Select menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Topology (p. 10) • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 271

Options

Close

Surface Match Method Example Creates Surface 4 using the Create/Match method that is topologically congruent with Surface 2. Notice that Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in and Surface 3 is deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Match

13 14 18

Before:

Surface ID List

4 2 3

**Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface 1 List
**

Surface 2 12 Y Z X 15 17

Surface 2 List

Surface 3

-Apply-

After:

13

14

18

2

4

12 Y Z X

15

17

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 272

Options

Close

**Creating Constant Offset Surface
**

This form is used to create a constant offset surface. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Offset

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the constant offset value of the surface. Specify the number of copies of the offset surface to create using the Repeat Count parameter.

Surface ID List

1

**Offset Parameters Constant Offset Value
**

1.0

Repeat Count

1

Do not use a guiding surface Auto Execute Surface List

By default, Do not use a guiding surface is set to use the surface normal or the direction vector, if reversed from the surface normal for the offset direction. If this toggle is changed to Use first surface as guiding surface, then the offset direction for all surfaces to be created will the same as the first surface in the Surface List. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surface used to create an offset surface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 10 11. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -Apply-

Draws the direction vector of the surface to create the offset surface from. Reverses the direction vector of the surface to create the offset surface from.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 273

Options

Close

Creating Constant Offset Surface Example Create surfaces 2 and 3 by offsetting from surface 1, a distance of 0.5 with a repeat count of 2 and reversing the direction vector of surface 1. Geometry Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Offset

Before:

Surface ID List

2

1

**Offset Parameters Constant Offset Value
**

0.5

Repeat Count

2

Y

**Do not use a guiding surface Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

X

Z

After:

Draw Direction Vector Reverse Direction Reset Graphics -Apply3 2 1

Y X Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 274

Options

Close

**Creating Ruled Surfaces
**

The Ruled method creates ruled surfaces between a pair of curves or edges. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Ruled

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

Surface Parameterization x Equal Arc Length x x Equal Parametric Values

**Avoid Bow Tie Surface Auto Execute
**

Ruling Curve 1 List

Ruling Curve 2 List

If Equal Arc Length is ON, MSC.Patran will define the ruled surface’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 parametric directions based on the arc length parameterizations of the ξ 1 direction for the curves or edges in Curve 1 List, and the ξ 2 direction for the curves or edges in Curve 2 List. If Equal Parametric Values is ON, the curves or edges in Curve 1 List define the surface’s ξ 1 direction and the curves or edges in Curve 2 List define the surface’s ξ 2 direction. The ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions are defined by the curve and surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 275

Options

Close

**Avoid Bow Tie Surface Auto Execute
**

Ruling Curve 1 List

If Avoid Bow Tie Surface is ON, MSC.Patran will optimize the ruled surface, so that the two curves ξ 1 directions do not need to be aligned or be in the same direction. The resulting ruled surface will not be twisted or bow tied. This is the default setting. If Allow Bow Tie Surface is ON, if the ξ 1 direction of the curves or edges in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List are not aligned, a bow tie ruled surface will be created.

Ruling Curve 2 List Specify in Ruling Curve 1 and 2 List, the two curves or edges to create the ruled surface between. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Curve 10, Surface 10.1); or cursor select them using the Curve Select menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Connectivity (p. 15) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 276

Options

Close

Surface Ruled Method Example Creates Surface 1 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curves 1 and 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create

6

Before:

Surface

2

Ruled

5

Surface ID List

1

**Surface Parameterization x Equal Arc Length x x Equal Parametric Values
**

1 Y Z X 1 4

**Avoid Bow Tie Surface Auto Execute Ruling Curve 1 List
**

Curve 1

After:

6 2 5

**Ruling Curve 2 List
**

Curve 2

-Apply-

1

1

Y Z X 1 4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 277

Options

Close

Surface Ruled Method Example Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Ruled method which is created between Curve 5 and an edge of Surface 2 by using the Curve select menu icon listed below. Notice that since Equal Parametric Values was pressed in, Surface 3’s parametric ξ 1 direction is the same as for Curve 5. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Ruled

2 2 17 1 1 12 Y Z X 16 5 20 19

Before:

18

Surface ID List

3

Surface Parameterization x Equal Arc Length x x Equal Parametric Values

**Avoid Bow Tie Surface Auto Execute Ruling Curve 1 List
**

Curve 5

After:

18

**Ruling Curve 2 List
**

Surface 2.4 19

-Apply2 2 17 1 1 1 2 12 Y 5 X 16 3 20

Curve Select Menu Icon

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 278

Options

Close

**Creating Trimmed Surfaces
**

The Trimmed method creates a trimmed surface. You must first create at least one chained curve for the surface’s outer loop or boundary by using the Create/ Curve/Chain form before using this form, or by bringing up the Auto Chain form from within this form. (Note that an outer loop must be specified, and the inner loop being specified is not necessary.) Trimmed surfaces can be meshed by Paver. Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Options for creating trimmed surfaces: 1. Surface: Creates a trimmed surface that has the same curvature as a specified parent surface. The parent surface must be simply trimmed (default color is green). 2. Planar: Creates a flat or planar trimmed surface. 3. Composite: Combines surfaces into a single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a specified length, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Use the Auto Chain feature to chain existing curves or surface edges into closed loops, defining the trim region. If ON, MSC.Patran will determine the new trimmed surface’s edge and vertex locations directly from the loop or chained curve’s definition. That is, the edges and vertices are defined by the links in the chained curve. If OFF, MSC.Patran will determine the edge and vertex locations of the new trimmed surface by the slope discontinuities in the chain.

**Method: Trimmed Surface ID List
**

1

Option: Surface

Auto Chain...

Use All Edge Vertices Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List

Delete Inner Loops Inner Loop List

Delete Constituent Surface Surface List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 279

Options

Close

Specify in Outer Loop List, one chained curve to represent the outer boundary of the trimmed surface either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Curve 10), or by cursor selecting the curve.

Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curves specified in the Outer Loop List listbox.

Delete Inner Loops Inner Loop List

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the chained curve specified in Inner Loop List. Specify in Inner Loop List, one or more optional chained curves to represent holes or cutouts in the trimmed surface, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (example: Curve 10 12), or by cursor selecting the curves.

Delete Constituent Surface Surface List

-Apply-

Specify in Surface List, the surfaces that will be the parent surface whose curvature will be used by the trimmed surface, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard, or by cursor selecting the surface. The parent surface must be simply trimmed (default color is green). Note: A Surface List is not required for the Planar option.

If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces specified in Surface List below from the database.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Creating Chained Curves (p. 131) • Meshing Surfaces with IsoMesh or Paver (p. 15) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 280

Options

Close

**Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Surface Option
**

Creates Surface 3 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Surface option which is created from chained Curve 22 for the outer loop, chained Curve 21 for the inner loop and Surface 2 for the parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are pressed in and Curves 21 and 22 and Surface 2 are deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

16

Before:

Method: Trimmed

19

Surface ID List

3

18

20

2 21 22 12

Option: Surface Auto Chain... Use All Edge Vertices Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List

Curve 22 Y X Z 17

**Delete Inner Loops Inner Loop List
**

Curve 21

After:

16 23 19 30 29 24 3 26 28 27 22 12 25

**Delete Constituent Surface Surface List
**

Surface 2 20

-Apply21 Y X Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 281

Options

Close

**Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Planar Option
**

Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Planar option which is created from chained Curve 14 for the outer loop and chained Curve 13 for the inner loop. Notice that Delete Outer Loop and Delete Inner Loop are pressed in and Curves 13 and 14 are deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Before:

14

**Method: Trimmed Surface ID List
**

2 13 12

Option: Planar Auto Chain.. . Use All Edge Vertices Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List

Curve 14 Y Z X 16

**Delete Inner Loops Inner Loop List
**

Curve 13

After:

18 17

22

-Apply21 2 12

20 Y Z X 19 16

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 282

Options

Close

**Auto Chain Subordinate Form
**

The Auto Chain form provides a more interactive, user-controllable way of creating Chain Curves. A start curve is selected for the chain and then during the creation of the chain, if necessary, the user will be prompted to make decisions on how to proceed by selecting the appropriate buttons. Toggles are provided for additional control of the chain curve creation. This subordinate form is accessible from either the Create/Curve/Chain or the Create/Surface/Trimmed forms.

If ON, the start point of the start curve can be switched from one end of the curve to the other. Auto Execute must be OFF. A start curve should be selected and then toggle ON and OFF to see a white marker designating the start point.

Auto Chain Auto Execute Select a Start Curve

Specify the existing curve or edge to use for the start curve of a chain either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 Surface 5.1 Solid 5.1.1. A Curve/Edge Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curve or edge.

Specify End Point Switch Start Point Pause At Every Point Current Group Only Free Edges Only Highlight Chain Creation Delete Constituent Curves

If ON, a Point select box allows to specify an end point for the chain curve. A chain curve will be created, if it reaches the end point. If OFF, the default end point is the start point.

If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable for creating a chain. If ON, only curves in the Current Group are selectable for creating a chain. If ON, after chain completes, the constituent curves used to create the chain will be deleted from the database.

If ON, the created chain curve will be highlighted. Either changing the value to OFF or picking another start curve will erase the highlight. If ON, the OK button must be selected for each constituent curve that is identified as the next curve in the chain. If OFF, it will automatically continue as.far as possible before user-intervention is necessary.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 283

Options

Close

Choose Curve to Continue

Identifies the curve which is chosen to continue the chain.

Next Previous Backup Delete -Apply-

OK Quit Stop Break Cancel

Next:

Used to update the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox when multiple choices are possible, i.e. a branch.

OK:

Used to finalize the selection on the curve echoed in the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox and continue the auto chain process. Used to end the auto chain process without attempting to creating a chain.

**Previous: Used to update "Choose Curve to
**

Continue" databox when more than two curves form a branch. Use in conjunction with the Next button.

Quit:

Backup:

Used to backup one curve at a time in the list of curves that have been previously selected as constituents for the resulting chain. Used to delete the curve in the "Choose Curve to Continue" databox from the database.

Stop:

Used to end the auto chain process and attempt to create a chain from the constituent curves. (Only necessary when pressing the Apply button did not create a chain.) Curve to Continue" databox.

Delete:

Break: Used to break the curve in the "Choose

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 284

Options

Close

**Creating Trimmed Surfaces with the Composite Option
**

The Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option provides a tool for combining surfaces into a single trimmed surface, where the parent trimmed surfaces may have gaps or overlaps of a specified distance, and are not required to be topologically congruent. Though the constituent surfaces are used for all evaluations without any approximation, the resulting composite surface is seen as a single trimmed surface by all operations that reference it, such as the Paver. Shadow Surface Method. The method used to create a composite trimmed surface is called a Shadow Surface Method. The best way to describe a shadow surface is to use a real life analogy. Consider a cloud in the sky to be a shadow surface. Then the sun, being the light source behind the cloud, creates a shadow on the planet Earth, only in the area blocked by the cloud. The same is true of the shadow surface, except a view vector is used to determine the light direction. The shadow itself is called an Under Surface, whose valid region is defined by where the outlines of the shadow surface appear with respect to a given view. The Shadow Surface itself is a collection of specified surfaces, which may have gaps or overlaps of a specified distance, and may or may not be topologically congruent. It is bounded by outer and inner loops, defined as closed chains of curves or surface edges. During surface evaluations, the Under Surface is used to classify the point relative to which constituent surface (amongst the Shadow Surface) contains it. The point is mapped to the parameter space of that constituent surface, and the evaluation is done directly on that surface. Creating Composite Surfaces. The steps in creating composite surfaces are, for the most part, the same as those for creating a normal trimmed surface, with the following exceptions:

• More than one surface is specified to define the curvature (multiple parent surfaces). • A Gap Distance parameter must be specified to define the maximum length for gaps

or overlaps.

• An appropriate view must be obtained, satisfying the following: • Double Intersections between the Shadow Surface and the view vector must not

occur. In other words, the Shadow Surface must not wrap around on itself relative to the current view. This is because the Under Surface is flat, and there is not necessarily a one-to-one mapping from the Shadow Surface to the Under Surface. Surfaces that combine to create a cylinder, therefore, cannot be used to create a single composite surface.

**• No Dead Space. Unpredictable results will occur if any portion of the Shadow Surface
**

does not have an Under Surface counterpart. An example of dead space would be an area on the Shadow Surface which runs parallel to the view vector. Since this portion has no area with respect to its projection onto the Under Surface, it will not be represented properly in the resulting composite surface. This can cause unwanted holes or spikes in the geometry.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 285

Options

Close

Shadow Plane Not Acceptable

S2 S1

Acceptable

S2 S1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 286

Options

Close

Surface Trimmed Method - Composite Option Example Creates Surface 5 using the Create/Surface/Trimmed/Composite option which is created from chained Curve 5 for the outer loop, chained Curve 4 for the inner loop and Surface 1:4 for the parent surface. Notice that Delete Outer and Inner Loop and Delete Constituent Surface are pressed in and Curves 1 and 2 and Surfaces 1:4 are deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Create

Before: 2 3 10 12 1 7 1 Y Z X 4

5

11 13 2 8 6

Surface

4

**Method: Trimmed Surface ID List
**

5

**Option: Composite Auto Chain... Gap Distance
**

0.005

3

**Use All Edge Vertices Delete Outer Loop Outer Loop List
**

Curve 5

After: 2 10 12 5 8 1 Y Z X 4 6 3 11 13 5

**Delete Inner Loops Inner Loop List
**

Curve 4

**Delete Constituent Surface Surface List
**

Surface 1:4

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 287

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces From Vertices (Vertex Method)
**

The Vertex method creates four sided surfaces from four existing point locations that define the surface’s vertices or corners. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Vertex

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If ON, MSC.Patran will allow you to specify a surface or solid face in the Manifold Surface databox to manifold the new surface onto. If the Manifold toggle is ON, enter the manifold surface or face for the new surface, either by entering the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor selecting it with the Surface Select menu.

Surface ID List

1

Manifold Manifold Surface

Auto Execute Surface Vertex 1 List Surface Vertex 2 List Surface Vertex 3 List Surface Vertex 4 List

Specify in Surface Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 Lists, the four points, vertices, nodes or other point locations that define the surface’s vertices or corners. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.1.1); or cursor select them using the Point Select menu.

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 288

Options

Close

Surface Vertex Method Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12, 13, 14 and Node 1. Notice that since Manifold is not on, the Manifold Surface databox is disabled. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Vertex

1 14

Before:

Surface ID List

2

Manifold Manifold Surface

Auto Execute

12

Y 13 Z X

**Surface Vertex 1 List
**

Point 12

**Surface Vertex 2 List
**

Point 13

After:

15

**Surface Vertex 3 List
**

Point 14 14

**Surface Vertex 4 List
**

Node 1

-Apply-

2

Y 12 Z X 13

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 289

Options

Close

**Extruding Surfaces and Solids
**

The Extrude method creates surfaces or solids by moving a curve or edge, or a surface or solid face, respectively, through space along a defined axis with the option of scaling and rotating simultaneously. This method is convenient for adding depth to a cross section, or for more complex constructions that require the full capabilities of this form. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create <Type> Extrude

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Set <Type> to either: Surface or Solid.

<Type> ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Origin of Scale and Rotate
**

[0 0 0]

Translation Vector

<1 0 0>

**Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

1.0

Angle

0.0 <Type> 1

Refer. Coordinate Frame is used by the Origin of Scale and Rotate databox and the Translation Vector databox to express the coordinates of the origin and vector within a specific coordinate frame. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0. Enter in Origin of Scale and Rotate, the point location of the origin of scaling and rotation. Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]); or use the Point Select menu to cursor define alternate point locations. Enter in Translation Vector, a vector definition defining the direction and distance that the curve or surface is moved through space. Either enter the coordinate values (example: <10 10 1>); or use the Vector Select menu to cursor define the translation vector.

per <Type>

Auto Execute <Type> List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 290

Options

Close

**Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

1.0

Angle

0.0 <Type> 1

per <Type>

Enter in Scale Factor, a scaling factor value to be applied in the two or three directions of the surface or solid, respectively. A scale factor of one means no scaling will take place. Enter in Angle, an optional angle value in degrees to rotate the curve or surface about the translation vector. <Type> per <Type> is not active or used if the PATRAN 2 Convention toggle is OFF. If ON, enter how many parametric bi-cubic surfaces per curve or how many parametric tri-cubic solids per curve to create.

**Auto Execute <Type> List
**

Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or surfaces or solid faces that you want to extrude to create the surfaces or solids, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 291

Options

Close

Surface Extrude Method Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from Curve 5. The surface is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction.

Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Extrude

Before:

Surface ID List

1 12

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Origin of Scale and Rotate
**

[0 0 0]

Y

5

13 Z X

Translation Vector

<1 0 0>

**Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

1.0

After:

3 4

Angle

0.0

**Surface per Curve
**

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 5

1

-ApplyZ

Y 1 X 5 2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 292

Options

Close

Surface Extrude Method Example This example is the same as the previous example, except that Surface 1 is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction about an angle of 90 degrees and with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale and rotation is at Point 14. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Extrude

Before:

Surface ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

12 14 Y

5

**Origin of Scale and Rotate
**

Point 14

13 Z X

Translation Vector

<0 10 0>

**Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

2.0

After:

16

Angle

90.0

**Surface per Curve
**

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 5

15 2

-ApplyY Z X

12 14 13

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 293

Options

Close

Solid Extrude Method Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Extrude method which is created from a face of Solid 1. The solid is extruded +10 units in the global Y direction, with a scale factor of 2. The origin of the scale is at Point 21. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Extrude

15 21 14 1 17 12

Before:

13

Solid ID List

2

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Origin of Scale and Rotate
**

Point 21 18Y Z X 19 20

Translation Vector

<0 10 0>

**Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

2.0

After:

22 25 24 23

Angle

0.0

**Solids per Curve
**

1

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Solid 1.5 2

-Apply15 Y

12 21 14 13

17 Z X 18

1

20 19

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 294

Options

Close

Gliding Surfaces

Gliding Surfaces with the 1 Director Curve Option

The Glide method creates biparametric surfaces by sweeping base curve along a path defined by a set of director curves or edges. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Glide

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

1

1 Option: Director Curve Glide Input Options x Fixed Glide x Normal Project Glide x Sweep Parameters Scale Factor

1.0

If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting the surface. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which basically drags the director curve along the base curve surface without rotating. Three degrees-of-freedom of motion are eliminated. Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no change will occur in the size of the director curve during the glide. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Curve List, one or more base curves or edges for surfaces. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

Auto Execute Director Curve List

Base Curve List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 295

Options

Close

Surface Glide Method - 1 Director Curve Example Creates Surfaces 2 through 4 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 10 for the Director Curve and Curves 11, 13 and 14 for the Base Curves. The scale is set to 1.0 and Fixed Glide is pressed in. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Glide

10

Before:

16

Surface ID List

2

**1 Option: Director Curve Glide Input Options x Fixed Glide x Normal Project Glide x
**

Z 12 11 Y X 17 18 13

19 14

**Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

1.0

After:

16 20 21

**Auto Execute Director Curve List
**

Curve 10

**Base Curve List
**

Curve 11 13 14

10

2 3 4

22

-Apply12 11 Y Z X 18 13

19 14 17

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 296

Options

Close

**Gliding Surfaces with the 2 Director Curve Option
**

This option sweeps a base curve along a path defined by a pair of director curves. Automatic scaling is optional. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Glide

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Surface ID List

2

2 Option: Director Curve Scale Base Curve Auto Execute Director Curve 1 List

If this toggle is ON, the base curve will automatically be scaled to fit between the two director curves, If OFF, no scaling will occur. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Director Curve 1 List and Director Curve 2 List provide a moving local coordinate system which provides for sweeping and scaling of the base curve. The Base Curve is swept along the two director curves. It does not need to be attached to either director. A copy will be transformed into its appropriate position for exclusive used by the surface.

Director Curve 2 List

Base Curve List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 297

Options

Close

Surface Glide Method - 2 Director Curve Example Creates Surface 1 by using Curves 1 and 2 as the director curves and Curve 3 as the base curve to glide along. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Glide

3 6 5 1 1 2 3 2 4

Before:

Surface ID List

1

**2 Option: Director Curve Scale Base Curve Auto Execute Director Curve 1 List
**

Curve 1 Y Z X

**Director Curve 2 List
**

Curve 2

After:

**Base Curve List
**

Curve 3

-Apply3 5 1 1 2 2 4

6

1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 298

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces and Solids Using the Normal Method
**

The Normal method creates parametric bi-cubic surfaces or solids which are defined by a set of base curves or surfaces, respectively, and an offset distance from those curves or surfaces in the direction of the curvature. The offset may be constant or have a varying thickness. Geometry Action: Object: Create <Type>

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface or solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If more than one ID is listed, the thickness of each surface or solid is based on dividing the number of surfaces or solids into the thickness value. If Constant Thickness is ON, a single thickness value is entered in the Thickness databox below (not shown here) which represents a constant offset distance for the Normal. Set <Type> to either Surface or Solid.

**Method: Normal <Type> ID List
**

1

**Thickness Input Options x Constant Thickness x x Varying Thicknesses Thickness at u=0; v=0
**

1.0

Thickness at u=0; v=1

1.0 <Type> per 1

If Varying Thickness is ON, you must enter two thickness values for surfaces and four thickness values for solids at the parametric ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate locations shown on the form. (The form here shows the thickness databoxes for creating a surface.)

<Type>

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 299

Options

Close

Shown only for creating surfaces. If Frenet Frame is ON, MSC.Patran uses a Frenet Frame in which the surfaces are blended together across the contiguous edges, provided the edges have the same ξ 1 ( u ) directions. If Construction Point is ON, enter the point location in the Construction Point databox, which defines the offset or thickness direction. The direction is measured from the first point of the first curve given in Curve List, to the construction point location. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Node 100, Curve 12.1); or cursor select the point location by using the Point Select menu.

Thickness at u=0; v=0

1.0

Thickness at u=0; v=1

1.0 <Type> per 1

<Type>

Active if PATRAN 2 Convention is ON. If ON, specify the number of parametric bi-cubic surfaces or parametric tri-cubic solids to create from each curve or surface specified in <Type> List below.

Construction Point Options x Frenet Frame x Construction Point x Construction Point

If ON, MSC.Patran will reverse the parametric ξ1 direction for the base curves listed in Curve List below.

Flip <Type> Normal Auto Execute <Type> List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to chose the Apply button to execute the form.

More Help:

Specify in <Type> List, the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces that you want to create surfaces or solids from, respectively. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 10, Surface 10.1, Solid 10.1.1; for surfaces - Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor select them by using the Curve or Surface Select menu. • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 300

Options

Close

Surface Normal Method Example Creates Surface 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Curve 5. It has a varying thickness of 0.75 at ξ 1 = 0 and x2=0 and a thickness of 2.0 at x1=0 and x2=1. Notice that the parametric direction is on. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Surface Normal

5

Before:

13

Surface ID List

2

**Thickness Input Options x Constant Thickness x x Varying Thicknesses
**

1

Thickness at u=0; v=0

0.75

Y Z X 12

Thickness at u=0; v=1

2.0

**Surfaces per Curve
**

1

After:

15

Construction Point Options x Frenet Frame x Construction Point x Construction Point

**Flip Curve Normal Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 5 Y 2 13 5 1 1 2 12 14

-Apply-

Z

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 301

Options

Close

Surface Normal Method Example Creates Surface 2 which is created from an edge of Surface 1. It has a constant thickness of 0.25 and the normal direction is defined by a construction point, Point 9. Notice that the normal direction is measured from the first vertex of the edge (Point 5) to Point 9. Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

9

Before:

**Method: Normal Surface ID List
**

2 1

**Thickness Input Options x Constant Thickness x Varying Thicknesses x Thickness
**

0.25 5

1

Y Z 6 X

2

**Surfaces per Curve
**

1

**Construction Point Options x Frenet Frame x x Construction Point Construction Point
**

Point 9

After:

9

2 10 1

**Flip Curve Normal Auto Execute Curve List
**

Surface 1.2

5 1 Y Z X

11

6 2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 302

Options

Close

Solid Normal Method Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Normal method which is created from Surface 1 and has a thickness of 0.5. Notice that since PATRAN 2 Convention is not pressed in, the Solids per Surface databox is disabled. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Normal

5

Before:

Solid ID List

1 1 1 6

**Thickness Input Options x Constant Thickness x Varying Thicknesses x
**

Y 4

Thickness

0.5 Z X

**Solids per Surface
**

1

**Flip Surface Normal Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

After:

8

-Apply-

7

5 9 1 1 1 10 Y 4 Z X 6

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 303

Options

Close

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the thickness is -0.5 instead of +0.5. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Normal

5

Before:

Solid ID List

1 1 1 6

**Thickness Input Options x Constant Thickness x Varying Thicknesses x
**

Y 4

Thickness

-0.5 Z X

**Solids per Surface
**

1

After:

Flip Surface Normal

5

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1 1 10 1 1 7 4 9 6

-Apply-

Y

8 X

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 304

Options

Close

Solid Normal Method From a Face Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Normal method which is created from a face of Solid 1 and has a thickness of 0.25. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create

22

Before:

Solid Normal

3 2 1 18 21 23

Solid ID List

2 20 1

**Thickness Input Options x Constant Thickness x Varying Thicknesses x Thickness
**

0.25 12 Z Y X 17 19

**Solids per Surface
**

1

After:

Flip Surface Normal Auto Execute Surface List

Solid 1.6 2 23 24 1 3 2 22 25

-Apply-

27 20 3 2 26118 1 21 19

Y 12 Z X 17

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 305

Options

Close

**Creating Surfaces from a Surface Mesh (Mesh Method)
**

The Mesh method creates a surface from a congruent 2-D mesh. Vertices can be defined on the surface boundary by selecting nodes in the Outer Corner Nodes or Additional Vertex Nodes listboxes. Every edge of the surface will have at least one node. If no node is selected to identify a vertex, then one will be selected automatically. The nodes entered in the Outer Corner Node listbox will define the parametrization of the surface and will also be a vertex. If no nodes are selected, 4 appropriate nodes will be selected automatically. Also the 4 nodes selected should be on the outer loop. Additional vertices can be defined by selecting nodes in the Additional Vertex Nodes listbox. The longest free edge loop will be the outer loop of the surface. The holes inside the mesh can be preserved or closed by invoking the options in the Inner Loop Options pull-down menu. When few of the inner holes need to be preserved Inner Loop Options is set to Select. Identify the holes by selecting at least 1 node on the hole. If selected, nodes on the outer loop and those not on the free boundary, will be ignored. The parametrization of the surface can also be improved by setting Surface Creation Methods to Better Parametrization. However, if speed were important and the mesh used to create the surface is of poor quality, selecting the Fast option under the Surface Creation Methods pulldown menu would create a better surface. Tessellated Surface is a representation of the underlying mesh that is used to create it. Therefore the surface is piecewise planar and the normals are not continuous. The surface is primarily generated to facilitate the meshing operation on complex surface models. Though these surfaces support most of the geometry operations, it has limitations due to the nature of the surface. To create a tessellated surface the mesh should have the following characteristics:

• Congruent 2-D elements • Should be one connected set of elements • No more than 2 elements should share the same 2 nodes • The outer or inner loop should not intersect.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 306

Options

Close

**Created Tessellated Surface from Geometry Form
**

Figure 4-2 Geometry Action: Create

Object: Surface Method: Mesh

Surface ID List

9

**Delete Original Elements Element List
**

Elm 1:322 364:445

If toggled ON, the elements selected will be deleted when the surface is created successfully.

Congruent element list that defines the surface.

Outer Corner Nodes 1 Node 292 3 Node 273 2 Node 288 4 Node 253

Select four corner nodes that define the four vertices of the resulting green surface or the parent surface of a trimmed surface. If any of the boxes are left empty, one will be selected automatically.

If there are more than four vertices for the surface, the additional nodes can be listed in the Additional Vertex Nodes listbox.

**Additional Vertex Nodes
**

Node 50 34 303 By setting Inner Loop Options to All, None or Select, the holes in the resulting surface can be defined.

Inner Loop Options:

All

Surface Creation Methods Fast -Apply-

Note: When the Inner Loop Options is set to Select, a node listbox opens. Here the holes to be preserved can be identified by the nodes on its edge. Any nodes not on the hole edge or on the outer boundary will be ignored.

By selecting the surface creation option, emphasis can be placed on parametrization or speed.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 307

Options

Close

Creating Midsurfaces

Creating Midsurfaces with the Automatic Option

This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Automatic Method. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Midsurface Surface ID List
**

1

Specify the midsurface option: 1. Automatic 2. Manual

Max. Thickness

0.01

Specify the maximum distance the solid face pairs can be apart in order to calculate a midsurface between (wall thickness)

Auto Execute Solid List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the solid(s) to create a midsurface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solid.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 308

Options

Close

Create Midsurface Automatic Example Create surfaces 1t6 by automatically computing the midsurfaces of solid 1 where the solid wall thickness is less than 8.1. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Before:

**Method: Midsurface Surface ID List
**

1 1

Max. Thickness

8.1

**Auto Execute Solid List
**

Solid 1 Z Y X

-Apply-

After:

3 1 4 1 2 6

5

Z Y X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 309

Options

Close

**Creating Midsurfaces with the Manual Option
**

This form is used to create a Midsurface using the Manual Method. The resulting midsurface will be trimmed to the domain of the parent surface pairs. Geometry Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next surface to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Midsurface Surface ID List
**

1

Specify the midsurface option: 1. Automatic 2. Manual

Auto Execute First Surface Set

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the first surface set of the pair to create a midsurface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1, Solid 1.1. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface. Specify the offset surface set of the pair to create a midsurface from either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 2, Solid 1.2. The Surface select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surface.

Offset Surface Set

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 310

Options

Close

Create Midsurface Manual Example Create surfaces 1t3 by manually selecting solid faces Solid 1.5 and Solid 1.9, Solid 1.4 and Solid 1.8, Solid 1.7 and Solid 1.10 as face pairs to create the midsurfaces from. Geometry Action: Object: Create Surface

Before:

**Method: Midsurface Surface ID List
**

1 1

**Auto Execute Solid Face List
**

Solid 1.5 1.4 1.7 Y Z X

**Offset Solid Face List
**

Solid 1.9 1.8 1.10

-Apply-

After:

1 1 3

2

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 311

Options

Close

**Creating Solid Primitives
**

Creating a Solid Block

This form is used to create a solid block with user input a point, length, width, height, and reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created block as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Specify the Solid Primitive type to create: 1. Block 2. Cylinder 3. Cone 4. Sphere 5. Torus

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the length, width, and height of the block.

**Block Parameters X Length List
**

1.0

Y Length List

1.0

Z Length List

1.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created block. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the block. Default is the global coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the base origin point of the block. Under The Refer. Coordinate Frame, the created block will start at this location extending length in x-axis, width in y-axis, and height in z-axis. If the base origin point is an [x,y,z] definition, the origin of the block will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame.

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Origin Point List
**

[0 0 0]

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 312

Options

Close

Creates solid blocks 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] and [2 0 0] with parameters of X=1.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 and X=2.0, Y=2.0, Z=2.0 respectively. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

**Block Parameters X Length List
**

1.0 2.0 Y

Y Length List

1.0 2.0 Z X

Z Length List

1.0 2.0

After:

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Origin Point List
**

[0 0 0] [2 0 0]

Y

-ApplyZ

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 313

Options

Close

Creates solid block 1 at [-1 .5 .5] with parameters of X=5.0, Y=1.0, Z=1.0 while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

2

1

**Block Parameters X Length List
**

5.0

Y Length List

1.0

Z

Y X

Z Length List

1.0

After:

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Origin Point List Boolean Operation [-1 .5 .5] Geometry -ApplyTarget Solid List
**

Solid 1

Z Y X

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK Cancel

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 314

Options

Close

**Creating Solid Cylinder
**

This form is used to create a solid cylinder with user input a point, height, radius, optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cylinder as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Specify the Solid Primitive type to create: 1. Block 2. Cylinder 3. Cone 4. Sphere 5. Torus

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the height, radius, and optional thickness which is used to shell the cylinder. Default = 0.0 which designates no shelling.

**Cylinder Parameters Height List
**

1.0

Radius List

1.0

[Thickness List]

0.0 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created cylinder. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the cylinder. Default is the global coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the base center point and the axis of the cylinder. If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the cylinder will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cylinder axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

Axis List

Coord 0.3

More Help: -Apply• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 315

Options

Close

Creates solid cylinder 1 at point 1with parameters of Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, along X axis. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1 1

**Cylinder Parameters Height List
**

3.0

Radius List

0.25 Z

Y X

[Thickness List]

0.0

After:

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Center Point List
**

Point 1

Axis List

Coord 0.1

Z Y X

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 316

Options

Close

Creates Solid Cylinder 1 at point 1 with parameters Height=3.0, Radius=0.25, a wall thickness = 0.125 along X axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create

8

Before:

Solid

9 5 1 4

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

2

**Cylinder Parameters Height List
**

3.0

6 3 Y Z X

Radius List

0.25

2

[Thickness List]

0.125

After:

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

5 4 8 9

**Auto Execute Base Center Point List Boolean Operation Geometry point 1 Axis List
**

Y 3 2

Coord 0.1

**Target Solid List
**

Solid 1

Z

X

-ApplyUpdate Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK Cancel

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 317

Options

Close

**Creating Solid Sphere
**

This form is used to create a solid sphere with user input a point, radius, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created sphere as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Specify the Solid Primitive type to create: 1. Block 2. Cylinder 3. Cone 4. Sphere 5. Torus

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the radius of the sphere

**Sphere Parameters Radius List
**

1.0

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created sphere. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the sphere. Default is the global coord 0.

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the center point and the axis of the sphere. If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the sphere will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the sphere axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

Axis List

Coord 0.3

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 318

Options

Close

Creates Solid Sphere 1 at [0 0 0] with a Radius of 1.0 along the Z axis. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

**Sphere Parameters Radius List
**

1.0 Y

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Z

X

After:

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

Axis List

Coord 0.3

-ApplyY Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 319

Options

Close

Creates Solid Sphere 1 at point 1with a Radius of 0.5 along the Y axis while performing a boolean add operation with solid 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

2

**Sphere Parameters Radius List
**

0.5

Y

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

Z

X

After:

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

Point 1

Axis List

Coord 0.2

-Apply-

**Boolean Operation Geometry
**

Y

**Target Solid List
**

Solid 1

Z

X

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK Cancel

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 320

Options

Close

**Creating Solid Cone
**

This form is used to create a solid cone with user input a point, base radius, top radius, height, optional thickness, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created cone as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Specify the Solid Primitive type to create: 1. Block 2. Cylinder 3. Cone 4. Sphere 5. Torus

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the height, top radius, bottom radius, and optional thickness. The optional thickness is used to create a hollow cone. Default = 0.0 which designates no hollowing.

**Cone Parameters Height List
**

1.0

**Base Radius List
**

1.0

**Top Radius List
**

0.5

[Thickness List]

0.0

If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created cone. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the cone. Default is the global coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the base center point and the axis of the cone. If the base center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the cone will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the cone axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

Axis List

Coord 0.3

More Help: -Apply• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 321

Options

Close

Creates Solid Cone 1 at [0 0 0] and Cone 2 at [3 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Height=2.0, Base Radius=1.0, Top Radius=0.5 and Thickness for Cone 1=0.0 and Thickness for Cone 2=0.125 Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

**Cone Parameters Height List
**

2.0 Y

**Base Radius List
**

1.0 Z X

**Top Radius List
**

0.5

After:

[Thickness List]

0.0 0.125

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Center Point List
**

Y [0 0 0] [3 0 0] X

Axis List

Coord 0.3

Z

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 322

Options

Close

Creates Solid Cones 1 and 2 at [.5 1 .5] along the Y axis with parameters Height=-5.0, Base Radius=0.25, Top Radius=0.0625 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1 and 2. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

1

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

**Cone Parameters Height List
**

2.0

Y 2

**Base Radius List
**

1.0

Z X

**Top Radius List
**

0.5

After:

[Thickness List]

0.0 0.125

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Base Center Point List
**

[0 0 0] [3 0 0]

**Boolean Operation Geometry
**

Y

Axis List

Coord 0.3

**Target Solid List
**

Solid 1 2

Z

X

-Apply-

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK Cancel

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 323

Options

Close

**Creating Solid Torus
**

This form is used to create a solid torus with user input a point, major radius, minor radius, and optional reference coordinate frame. It also provides an option to perform boolean operation with the input target solid using the created torus as the tool solid. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Specify the Solid Primitive type to create: 1. Block 2. Cylinder 3. Cone 4. Sphere 5. Torus Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Specify the major radius and minor radius.

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

**Torus Parameters Major Radius List
**

1.0

**Minor Radius List
**

0.5 If ON, enable the boolean operation option. When the selectdatabox is displayed, select a target solid to perform a boolean operation on with the created torus. Specify the reference coordinate frame to position the torus. Default is the global coord 0.

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the center point and the axis of the torus. If the center point is an [x,y,z] definition, the location of the torus will be created in the provided Refer. Coordinate Frame. The input Axis is not with reference to the Refer. Coordinate Frame, therefore, the torus axis will be defined by the absolute value of the Axis specified, where the default is the z axis of Coord 0.

Axis List

Coord 0.3

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 324

Options

Close

Creates Solid Torus 1 and 2 at [0 0 0] with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.5 and Torus 1 along the X axis and Torus 2 along the Y axis. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

1

**Torus Parameters Major Radius List
**

1.0 Y

**Minor Radius List
**

0.5 Z X

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

After:

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

Axis List

Coord 0.1 0.2

-ApplyZ

Y X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 325

Options

Close

Creates Solid Torus 1 at [0 0 0] along the Z axis with parameters Major Radius=1.0, Minor Radius=0.25 while performing a boolean add operation with Solid 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Before:

Method: Primitive

Solid ID List

2

**Torus Parameters Major Radius List
**

1.0

**Minor Radius List
**

0.25

Z

Y X

**Modify Solid Boolean Operation... Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

After:

**Auto Execute Center Point List
**

[0 0 0]

Axis List

Coord 0.3

Boolean Operation Geometry

**-Apply- Solid List Target
**

Solid 1

Z

Y X

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK Cancel

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 326

Options

Close

**Solid Boolean operation during primitive creation
**

This form is used to perform a Solid boolean operation on an existing solid during the creation of a new primitive solid. This is a child form of the parent Create,Solid,Primitive form.

Boolean Operation Geometry

Specify the boolean operation type: 1. Add 2. Subtract 3. Intersect

Target Solid List

Update Solid Mesh /LBC(ON) OK Cancel

Specify the solid to perform a boolean operation on either by cursor selecting them or by entering the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Solid 10 11. The Solid select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate solids. This button, by default is disabled since updates of an existing mesh and LBC on a parasolid solid will occur automatically after a boolean operation. If the Geometry Preference toggle, Auto Update Solid Mesh/LBC, is turned off, then this button will be enabled and the label will be, “Update Solid Mesh/LBC”. Pressing this button after the boolean operation is complete will update the existing mesh on the target solid.

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 327

Options

Close

**Creating Solids from Surfaces (Surface Method)
**

Creating Solids from Two Surfaces

The Surface method with the 2 Surface option, creates solids between two surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List

1

**Option: 2 Surface Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute
**

Starting Surface List Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the surfaces to be created, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or cursor define the surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Deactivated and not used for the 2 Surface option. If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. On the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric you can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by turning the Parametric Direction toggle ON.

Ending Surface List

-ApplyMore Help:

Topology (p. 10) Connectivity (p. 15) Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions • • • • •

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 328

Options

Close

Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surfaces 2 and 3. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

3 10 11 6

Before:

7

Solid ID List

1

9

**Option: 2 Surface Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform
**

Z

12

2

Y X 5 8

**Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute Starting Surface List
**

Surface 2

After:

7 10 11 6

**Ending Surface List
**

Surface 3

-Apply-

3 1 9 12 2

Y Z X 5 8

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 329

Options

Close

Solid Surface Method With 2 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Surface/2 Surface option. The solid is created between Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6, using the Surface select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

23

Before:

22 6

Solid ID List

1 20 5 18 21 2

Option: 2 Surface Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute Starting Surface List

Surface 2 12 Z Y X

19

17

After:

22 6 23

**Ending Surface List
**

Construct2CurvesSurface(Eval

-Apply20 5 1 18 21 2

19

12

Y X 17

Surface Select Menu Icon

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 330

Options

Close

**Creating Solids from Three Surfaces (Surface Method)
**

The Surface method with the 3 Surface option creates solids that pass through three existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the solid’s starting, middle and ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized. If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Solid ID List

1

**Option: 3 Surface Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute
**

Starting Surface List

Middle Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 331

Options

Close

**Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute
**

Starting Surface List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Middle Surface List

Ending Surface List

Specify in Starting, Middle and Ending Surface Lists, the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or by cursor defining the surface locations using the Surface Select menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 332

Options

Close

Solid Surface Method With 3 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/3 Surface option. The solid is created between a face of Solid 1, Surface 2 and a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 by using the Surface select menu icon listed below. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

2 12 17 20 5 21 18 19

Before:

22 6 23

Solid ID List

2

Option: 3 Surface Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute Starting Surface List

Solid 1.2 Z 27 26 Y X 24 25 1

31 30

28 29

After:

22 20 5 21 18 2 12 17 19 6 23

**Middle Surface List
**

Surface 2

**Ending Surface List
**

Construct2CurveSurface(Eval

-Apply-

31 30 27 26 Y 1 28 Z X 24 25 29

Surface Select Menu Icon

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 333

Options

Close

**Creating Solids from Four Surfaces (Surface Method)
**

The Surface method using the 4 Surface option creates solids that pass through four existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List

1

**Option: 4 Surface Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute
**

Starting Surface List

If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the solid’s starting, second, third and ending surfaces. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.

Second Surface List

If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

Third Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 334

Options

Close

**Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute
**

Starting Surface List By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Second Surface List Specify the surfaces or solid faces for the new solids to pass through, either by entering the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1), or by cursor defining the surface locations using the Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Third Surface List

Ending Surface List

-Apply-

More Help:

• • • • Topology (p. 10) Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 335

Options

Close

Solid Surface Method With 4 Surface Option Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Surface/4 Surface option. The solid is created between a face of Solid 1, Surface 2, a surface defined by Curves 5 and 6 and Surface 3. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

22 6 23 20 5 21 2 18 19 32

Before:

35 3 33 34

Solid ID List

2

Option: 4 Surface Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Auto Execute Starting Surface List

Solid 1.2 Z

12

17 31 30

27 Y X

26 1 28 29

24

25

After:

32 35 3 33 6 23 34

**Second Surface List
**

Surface 2

**Third Surface List
**

Construct2CurveSurface(Eval 20 5 2 21 2 12 17 31 27 Y Z X 26 1 28 24 25 29 30 18 19 22

**Ending Surface List
**

Surface 3

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 336

Options

Close

**Creating Solids with the N Surface Option
**

The Surface method using the N-Surfaces option creates solids that pass through any number of existing surfaces or solid faces. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List

1 If Chord Length is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the new solid is based on the chord length distances relative to the location of the surfaces specified in Surface List. This means the solid may or may not be uniformly parameterized, depending on where the surfaces are located. If Uniform is ON, the parametric coordinates of the points defining the solid will be uniformly spaced, regardless of where the surfaces are located. That is, the solid will be always uniformly parameterized.

Option: N-Surfaces Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Surface List

If ON, MSC.Patran will align the surfaces’ parametric ξ1 and ξ2 directions before creating the solid. The ξ1 and ξ2 directions are defined by the surface’s connectivity. You can plot the ξ1 direction of the new curves by choosing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

-ApplySpecify in Surface List, two or more surfaces or faces that the solid will pass through. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 337

Options

Close

Solid Surface Method with N-Surfaces Option Example Creates Solid1 using the Create/Surface/N-Surfaces option. The solid is created between Surfaces 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10.

Before:

Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Surface

10 9 43 8 32 40 24 Y X Z 12 20 16 13 7 37 2 34 15 33 41 39 38 36 35 42

Solid ID List

1

**Option:N-Surfaces Parameterization Method x Chord Length x x Uniform Auto Align Orientations Surface List
**

Surface 2 7:10

28

14

After:

42 41 39 38 36 10 9 8 32 1 43 28 24 Y X Z 12 20 16 40 13 7 37 2 34 15 14 33 35

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 338

Options

Close

**Creating a Boundary Representation (B-rep) Solid
**

The B-rep method creates boundary represented solids by specifying a list of surfaces or solid faces that form a closed topologically congruent volume. B-rep solids can only be meshed with MSC.Patran’s TetMesh. For more information, see Gliding Solids (p. 348). Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid B-rep

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If ON, MSC.Patran will delete the surfaces from the database that are specified in Surface List. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Solid ID List

1

Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List

-Apply-

Specify in Surface List, a set of surfaces or solid faces that form a closed volume. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 1:10, Solid 10.2 11.1), or cursor select the surfaces or faces using the Surface Select menu that appears.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • B-rep Solid (p. 24) • Building B-rep Solids (p. 40)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 339

Options

Close

Solid B-rep Method Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Solid/B-rep method which is created from Surfaces 2, 3, 4, and 8 through 14. Notice that since Delete Original Surfaces is pressed in, the surfaces are deleted. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid B-rep

8 4 3 2

Before:

Solid ID List

1 9

14

**Delete Original Surfaces Auto Execute Surface List
**

Y Surface 2 3 4 8:14 Z X

13 10

11

12

-Apply-

After:

1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 340

Options

Close

**Creating a Decomposed Solid
**

The Decompose method creates solids from two opposing solid faces by choosing four vertex locations on each face and then a solid is created from the two decomposed faces. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

**Method: Decompose Solid ID List
**

2 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Solid Faces x Face 1 x Face 2 x Solid Face 1
**

Enter the first solid face to decompose either by entering the ID from the keyboard (example: Solid 1.1); or by cursor selecting the solid face. The switch to select/show the two Solid Faces.

Auto Execute Face Vertex 1 List Face Vertex 2 List Face Vertex 3 List Face Vertex 4 List

Enter in the Face Vertex 1,2,3 and 4 listboxes, the four vertices that will define the surface from which the new solid will be created from. Use the Vertex Select menu that appears on the bottom to cursor select the vertices.

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 341

Options

Close

Solid Decompose Method with Face 1 Option Example Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid 1.5. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Step 1:

2 6 7 3

**Method: Decompose Solid ID List
**

2

**Solid Faces x Face 1 x Face 2 x Solid Face 1
**

Solid 1.6

1

1 Y Z 5 4 8

X

**Auto Execute Face Vertex 1 List
**

1.6(u0.250000) (v0.750000)

**Face Vertex 2 List
**

1.6(u0.788091) (v0.706851)

**Face Vertex 3 List
**

1.6(u0.727486) (v0.239363)

**Face Vertex 4 List
**

1.6(u0.239563) (v0.283655)

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 342

Options

Close

Solid Decompose Method with Face 2 Option Example Creates Solid 2 by selecting four points on solid face Solid 1.6 and four points on solid face Solid 1.6. Geometry Action: Object: Create Solid

Step 2:

2 6 7 1 1 Y Z 5 4 8 3

**Method: Decompose Solid ID List
**

2

**Solid Faces x Face 1 x Face 2 x Solid Face 2
**

Solid 1.5

X

**Auto Execute Face Vertex 1 List
**

1.5(u0.314087)(v0.722847)

Final Step:

**Face Vertex 2 List
**

1.5(u0.707491)(v0.666261)

2 6 9 2 1 13 7 12 14 16 15 4 8 3

**Face Vertex 3 List
**

1.5(u0.658263)(v0.286671)

**Face Vertex 4 List
**

1.5(u0.291373)(v0.250680)

-Apply-

10 Y Z 5 11

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 343

Options

Close

**Creating Solids from Faces
**

The Face method creates a solid from five or six surfaces or solid faces which define the solid’s exterior faces. The surfaces or faces can be in any order and they can have any parametric orientation, but they must define a valid exterior of a solid. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Face

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List

1

**Option: 6 Face Auto Execute
**

Solid Face 1 List

Set this option to 5 Face or 6 Face. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Solid Face 2 List

Solid Face 3 List

Specify in the Solid Face Lists, the list of surfaces or solid faces that the solid will be created from. Depending if the form is set to the 5 Face or 6 Face option, you will see five or six Solid Face List boxes. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select them using the Surface Select menu.

Solid Face 4 List

Solid Face 5 List

More Help:

Solid Face 6 List • Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 344

Options

Close

Solid Face Method With 6 Faces Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 2 through 7. The option is set to 6 Face. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid

5

Before:

Face

Solid ID List

1 4 6 3 7

**Option: 6 Face Auto Execute Solid Face 1 List
**

Surface 2 Y X

2

**Solid Face 2 List
**

Surface 6

Z

**Solid Face 3 List
**

Surface 4

After:

**Solid Face 4 List
**

Surface 5

**Solid Face 5 List
**

Surface 7

**Solid Face 6 List
**

Surface 3 1

-ApplyY Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 345

Options

Close

Solid Face Method With 5 Faces Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Face method which is created from Surfaces 1 through 5. The option is set to 5 Face. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Face

1 4 1 2 5 Y Z X 4 6 3 2 3

Before:

5

Solid ID List

1

**Option: 5 Face Auto Execute Solid Face 1 List
**

Surface 1

**Solid Face 2 List
**

Surface 3

**Solid Face 3 List
**

Surface 2

After:

3

**Solid Face 4 List
**

Surface 4 5

**Solid Face 5 List
**

Surface 5 2 1 1

-ApplyY Z X 4 6

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 346

Options

Close

**Creating Solids from Vertices (Vertex Method)
**

The Vertex method creates parametric tri-cubic solids by specifying a list of eight point locations that represent the eight vertices of the new solid. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Vertex

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Solid ID List

1

Auto Execute

Solid Vertex 1 List

Solid Vertex 2 List

Solid Vertex 3 List Specify in Solid Vertex 1-8 Lists, the list of points, vertices, nodes or other point locations that the solid will be created from. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: Point 10, Curve 10.1, Node 20); or cursor select them using the Point Select menu.

Solid Vertex 4 List

Solid Vertex 5 List

Solid Vertex 6 List

Solid Vertex 7 List

Solid Vertex 8 List

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 25) • PATRAN 2 Neutral File Support For Parametric Cubic Geometry (p. 57)

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 347

Options

Close

Solid Vertex Method Example Creates Solid 2 using the Create/Vertex method which is created from Points 12 through 15 and Nodes 34, 44, 254 and 264. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Vertex

12

Before:

13 14 15

Solid ID List

2

**Auto Execute Solid Vertex 1 List
**

Point 12

**Solid Vertex 2 List
**

Point 13 Z

Y X

**Solid Vertex 3 List
**

Point 14

**Solid Vertex 4 List
**

Point 15

After:

13 14 15

**Solid Vertex 5 List
**

Node 34 12

**Solid Vertex 6 List
**

Node 44 1 19

**Solid Vertex 7 List
**

Node 254 16 18

**Solid Vertex 8 List
**

Node 264 Y 17

-Apply-

Z

X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 348

Options

Close

Gliding Solids

The Glide method creates triparametric solids by sweeping a base surface curve along a path defined by a set of director curves or edges. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Glide

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next solid to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. If Normal Project Glide is ON, MSC.Patran avoids twisting the solid. One degree-of-freedom of motion is eliminated. If Fixed Glide is ON, MSC.Patran uses “fixed” logic which basically drags the director curve along the base curve or base surface without rotating. Three degrees-of -freedom of motion are eliminated.

Solid ID List

1

**Glide Input Options x Normal Project Glide x Fixed Glide x Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

1.0

Enter an optional scale factor value to be applied to the director curve during the glide. A default of 1 means no change will occur in the size of the director curve during the glide. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Director Curve List, the curve or edge that will act as the Glide’s director curve. Specify in Base Surface List, a base surface or face for the Glide method for solids. Either enter the IDs from the keyboard (examples: for curves - Curve 1:10, Surface 10.1 11.1; for surfaces Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select the curves or edges, or the surfaces or faces using the Curve or Surface Select menu.

Auto Execute Director Curve List

Base Surface List

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Matrix of Geometry Types Created (p. 27)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.2 349

Options

Close

Solid Glide Method Example Creates Solid 1 using the Create/Glide method which is created from Curve 5 for the Director Curve and Surface 2 for the Base Surface. The scale is set to 0.25 and Fixed Glide is pressed in. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Solid Glide

17 2 16

Before:

Solid ID List

1 18

12

**Glide Input Options x Normal Project Glide x x Fixed Glide Sweep Parameters Scale Factor
**

0.25 Y Z

5 15

X

**Auto Execute Director Curve List
**

Curve 5

After:

**Base Surface List
**

Surface 2 17 2

16

-Apply18

12 1 5 Z Y X 20 21 19 15

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 350

Options

Close

4.3

**Creating Coordinate Frames
**

Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 3Point Method

The 3Point method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying three point locations. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. For more information, see Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63). Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: 3Point Coord ID List
**

1

Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

Type: Rectangular

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute

Origin [0 0 0] Point on Axis 3 [0 0 1] Point on Plane 1-3 [1 0 0]

Specify three point locations for: 1 ) the new coordinate frame’s origin; 2) a point on the third axis; and 3) a point on the plane formed by the coordinate frame’s first and third axes. Either enter the point locations’ coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor select the point locations using the Point Select menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 351

Options

Close

Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/3Point method. Its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a point on its Z axis is at [0,0,1]; and a point on the R-Z plane is at [0,0,1]. The coordinate values are expressed within the global coordinate frame, Coord 0. Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

Before:

**Method: 3Point Coord ID List
**

100 2

Type:

Cylindrical

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0 Y Z X

**Auto Execute Origin
**

[0 0 0]

Point on Axis 3

[0 0 1]

After:

Point on Plane 1-3

[1 0 0]

-Apply2

T Z R 100

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 352

Options

Close

Coordinate Frame 3Point Method Example Creates a cylindrical coordinate frame, Coord 200. Its origin is located at Point 8; a point on its Z axis is at [x8 y8 2] (which is at the X and Y coordinates of Point 8 and at Z=2); and a point on the R-Z plane is at Point 6. Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

1 1

Before:

**Method: 3Point Coord ID List
**

200

Type:

Cylindrical

5

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0 Y 8

2

**Auto Execute Origin
**

Point 8 Z X

6

Point on Axis 3

[x8 y8 2]

After:

Point on Plane 1-3

Point 6 1 1

-Apply5

T 2 2 8 Z 00 R Y Z 6 X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 353

Options

Close

**Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Axis Method
**

The Axis method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame by specifying three point locations for the coordinate frame’s origin, at the first, second or third axis and on one of the remaining two axes. The point locations can be points, vertices, nodes or other point locations provided on the Point select menu. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63). Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical. Specify the coordinate frame to express the coordinate values of the three point locations, if coordinate values are entered. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0. Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Method: Axis Coord ID List
**

1

Type: Rectangular

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

**Axis: Axis 1 and 2 Auto Execute
**

Origin [0 0 0] Point on Axis 1 [1 0 0] Point on Axis 2 [0 1 0]

Specify three point locations for: 1) the new coordinate frame’s origin, 2) a point on axis 1, 2 or 3 and 3) a point on axis 2, 3 or 1. Either enter the coordinate values (example: [10 0 0]) or cursor select the point locations by using the Point Select menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 354

Options

Close

Coordinate Frame Axis Method Example Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100, using the Create/Axis method. Its definition is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0; its origin is located at [0,0,0]; a point on its X axis is at Point 20; and a point on its Y axis is at Point 12. Geometry Action: Object: Create

16 19

Before:

Coord

**Method: Axis Coord ID List
**

100 2 12

**Type: Rectangular Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0 Y 17 Z X 18 20

**Axis: Axis 1 and 2 Auto Execute Origin
**

[0 0 0]

After:

16 19

Point on Axis 1

Point 20

Point on Axis 2

Point 12

-Apply2 Z 100 Y X 20 Y 17 Z X 18 12

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 355

Options

Close

**Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method
**

The Euler method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame through three specified rotations about the axes of an existing coordinate frame. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63). Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Coord Euler

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Coord ID List

1 Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical. Specify the coordinate frame whose axes the three rotations will be about. Default is the Global rectangular frame, Coord 0. When ON, a Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears which is described on Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example (p. 357). By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Type: Rectangular

Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0

**Axis: Rotation Parameters ... Auto Execute
**

Origin [0 0 0]

-Apply-

Specify the point location for the origin of the new coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values which are expressed within the reference coordinate frame (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the Point Select menu.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 356

Options

Close

Coordinate Frame Euler Method Example Creates a spherical coordinate frame, Coord 200, using the Create/Euler method. Its definition is expressed within the rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 100; its origin is located at Point 14 and it is rotated 45 degrees about Coord 100’s X axis. Geometry Action: Object: Method: Create Coord Euler

13

Before:

Coord ID List

200

Type:

Spherical

Y Z X 14 100 X 12

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 100 Y

**Axis: Rotation Parameters ... Auto Execute Origin
**

Point 14

Z

After:

-Apply-

13

Y 100 Z Y Y 200 X Z X Z X 12

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 357

Options

Close

Rotation Parameters Subordinate Form Example The Rotation Parameters subordinate form appears when the Rotation Parameters button is pressed on the Geometry Application Create/Coord/Euler form. See Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Euler Method (p. 355). This form allows you to define up to three rotations to be performed about the specified Reference Coordinate Frame axes. The rotations are performed in sequence from top to bottom on the form. Rotation Parameters First Rotation Axis: About Axis 3

Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3.

Angle of Rotation

0.0 Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to rotate about the indicated axis.

**Second Rotation Axis: About Axis 1
**

Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3. Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to rotate about the indicated axis.

Angle of Rotation

0.0

**Third Rotation Axis: About Axis 3
**

Set this option to About Axis 1, About Axis 2 or About Axis 3. Specify an angle in degrees between -180° and +180° to rotate about the indicated axis.

Angle of Rotation

0.0

OK

Cancel

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 358

Options

Close

**Creating Coordinate Frames Using the Normal Method
**

The Normal method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its origin at a point location on a specified surface or solid face, and its axis 3 direction normal to the surface or face. The coordinate frame’s axis 1 direction can be aligned with the surface’s or face’s parametric ξ 1 direction, and its axis 2 direction will be aligned with the ξ 2 direction or visa versa. See Overview of Create Methods For Coordinate Frames (p. 63) for more information. You can plot the parametric ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction button on the Geometric Properties form under the Display/Display Properties/Geometric menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Normal Coord ID List
**

1

Create x-axis of the coordinate frame along the u-direction or along the v-direction of the surface. Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical or Spherical.

**Type: Rectangular Auto Execute
**

Origin [0 0 0] Surface

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify in Origin, the point location for the origin of the new coordinate frame, either by entering the coordinate values that are expressed within the global rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 0 (example: [10 0 0]); or by cursor defining the point location using the Point Select menu. Specify in Surface, the surface or solid face that the new coordinate frame will be created on, whose normal direction will define the coordinate frame’s axis 3 direction. Either enter the ID from the keyboard (examples: Surface 10, Solid 10.1); or cursor select it by using the Surface Select menu.

-Apply-

More Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60) • Display Attributes (p. 243) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 2: Basic Functions

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 359

Options

Close

Coordinate Frame Normal Method Example Creates a rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 1, using the Create/Normal method whose Z axis is normal to Surface 2 and its origin is at Point 16. Notice that Coord 1’s X and Y axis are aligned with Surface 2’s ξ 1 and ξ 2 directions. Geometry Action: Object: Create

13

Before:

15

Coord

**Method: Normal Coord ID List
**

1 16 2

**Type: Rectangular Auto Execute Origin
**

Point 16 Y Z X 14

2

1 12

Surface

Surface 2

After:

13 15 Y X Z 1 16 2

-Apply-

2 Y Z X 14

1 12

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 360

Options

Close

Coordinate Frame Normal Method On a Face Example Creates rectangular coordinate frame, Coord 2 at Point 17, whose Z axis is normal to the top face of Solid 1. Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

1 13 9 16 10 T Z Y Z X 12 R 11 15 14 17

Before:

**Method: Normal Coord ID List
**

2

**Type: Rectangular Auto Execute Origin
**

Point 17

Surface

solid 1.6

After:

-ApplyZ 1 13 9 16 10 T Z Y Z 12 11 X 14 2 17 X Y

R 15

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 361

Options

Close

**Creating Coordinate Frames Using the 2 Vector Method
**

The 2 Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical or spherical coordinate frame with its origin at the designated location. Two of the through coordinate frame axes are defined using existing vectors; their directions are imposed at the selected origin and the new coordinate frame is then created. Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical. Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: 2Vector Coord ID List
**

1

**Type: Rectangular Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Axis: Axis 1 and 2 Auto Execute Origin
**

[0 0 0]

Set this option to Axis 1 and 2, Axis 2 and 3, or Axis 3 and 1.

Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

**Vector for Axis 1 Vector for Axis 2
**

Select the vectors that define two of the through coordinate frame axes.

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.3 362

Options

Close

**Creating Coordinate Frames Using the View Vector Method
**

The View Vector method creates a rectangular, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate frame at the designated origin, using the Euler angles that define the current model orientation within the graphics viewport. Geometry Action: Object: Create Coord

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next coordinate frame to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Set this option to Rectangular, Cylindrical, or Spherical. Select the reference coordinate frame from which the Euler angles are to be computed and subsequently used to define the new coordinate frame.

**Method: View Vector Coord ID List
**

1

**Type: Rectangular Refer. Coordinate Frame Coord 0 Auto Execute Origin
**

[0 0 0]

Defines the origin of the new coordinate frame.

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 363

Options

Close

4.4

Creating Planes

Creating Planes with the Point-Vector Method

The Point-Vector method creates planes at a point and normal to a vector. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane Point-Vector

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Plane ID List

1 By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the points from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point1 5, Curve 1.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

Auto Execute Point List Vector List

Apply

Specify the vectors for the new planes. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 364

Options

Close

Point-Vector Method Example Creates a plane at a point and normal to a vector. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane Point-Vector

Before:

Plane ID List

1 1 1

**Auto Execute Point List
**

Point 1 Y Z X

Vector List

Vector 1

Apply

After:

1

1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 365

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Vector Normal Method
**

The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Vector Normal Plane ID List

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to define the plane offset from the vector base point. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Plane Offset Distance
**

0.0

**Auto Execute Vector List
**

Point 2

Apply

Specify the vectors from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Vector Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate vectors.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 366

Options

Close

Vector Normal Option Example Creates a plane from Vector 1. The normal of the plane is parallel to the Vector. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Vector Normal Plane ID List

1 1

Before:

**Plane Offset Distance
**

0.0

**Auto Execute Vector List
**

Vector 1 Z Y X

Apply

After:

11

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 367

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method
**

Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method - Point Option

The Point on Curve method using the Point option creates Planes normal to a tangent vector of a point along a curve. The plane centroid will be the point location on the curve.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Curve Normal Plane ID List
**

1 Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric.

Option:

Point

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Point 2

Point List

Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves. Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Apply

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 368

Options

Close

Point Option Example Creates a plane whose normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 on the location where Point 3 is projected on the curve. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Curve Normal Plane ID List

1

Before:

3

2

Option:

Point

1

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1

Y Z X

Point List

Point 3

Apply

After:

3 1

2

1 1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 369

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Curve Normal Method-Parametric Option
**

The Point on Curve method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are normal to a specified curve at a parametric position along the curve. The plane centroid will be the parametric position along the curve.

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Curve Normal Plane ID List
**

1 Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric. Specify the curves’s ξ 1 ( u ) coordinate value, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. You can plot the ξ1 direction by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

**Option: Parametric Parametric Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve List

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

Apply

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 370

Options

Close

Parametric Option Example Creates a plane on Curve 1 at the specified parametric location. Its normal is parallel to the tangent of Curve 1 at that location. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Curve Normal Plane ID List

1

Before:

1

**Option: Parametric Parametric Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5 1 Y Z X 2

**u Parametric Value Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1

After:

Apply

1 1

1

Y Z X

2

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 371

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Plane Normal Method
**

The Plane Normal method creates a plane normal to an existing plane. The line defined by the projection of the new plane onto the existing plane is defined by selecting a vector; this vector is projected normally onto the existing plane. The new plane’s normal direction is defined by the vector cross product of the existing plane normal by the projected vector. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Plane Normal Plane ID List

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Auto Execute Plane List

Select existing plane that is perpendicular to newly created plane.

Vector List

Select vector that defines orientation of newly created plane.

Apply

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 372

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method
**

Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Uniform Option

The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents at the interpolating points on the curve. Uniform option will space the planes along the curve based on the equal arc lengths or equal parametric values upon the user’s choice. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane Interpolate

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is 1, one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2, two planes are created at both end of the curve. The default value is 3.

Plane ID List

1

Number of Planes

3

Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Plane Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x

Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or parametric values. Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio for Nonuniform spacing.

Auto Execute Curve List

Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

Apply

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 373

Options

Close

Plane Interpolate Example Creates planes on curve 1 at the interpolating points. The plane’s normals are parallel to the tangents of Curve 1 at each location. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane Interpolate

Before:

Plane ID List

1 1

Number of Planes

3 1

2

**Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Plane Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x
**

Y Z X

After:

2

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1 3 1 1 Y Z X 1 4 1

Apply

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 374

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Interpolate Method - Nonuniform Option
**

The Interpolate method creates Planes whose normals are in the direction of the curve tangents at the interpolating points on the curve. Nonuniform option will space the planes along the curve based on the space ratio applied on the arc length or the parametric values upon the user’s choice. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane Interpolate

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to define the number of planes to be interpolated. If it is 1, one plane is created at the beginning of the curve. If it is 2, two planes are created at both end of the curve. The default value is 3.

Plane ID List

1

Number of Planes

3

Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x Plane Spacing Method x Uniform x x Nonuniform . L1. . . L2 .

Used to define the spacing based on equal arc length or parametric values.

Used to define the spacing method of Uniform or the ratio for Nonuniform spacing.

L2/L1 =

1.5

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: curve 1. The CurveSelect menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

Apply

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 375

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method
**

Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Point Option

The Least Squares method using the Point option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a set of points that are not co-linear. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Least Squares Plane ID List

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option: Point List

Point

Used to express the entity type to create the plane from. Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.

Apply

Specify the points from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the points or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 to 5. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 376

Options

Close

Point Option Example Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Point 1:4. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Least Squares Plane ID List

1 1

Before:

3

**Option: Point List
**

Point 1:4

Point

4

2

Y

Apply

Z

X

After:

3

1 1 2 4

Y X Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 377

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Curve Option
**

The Least Squares method using the Curve option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a non-linear curve. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Least Squares Plane ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to express the entity type to create the plane from. Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.

Option:

Curve

Auto Execute Curve List

Apply

Specify the curves from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the curves or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Curve 1 5, Surface 1.2. The Curve Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate curves.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 378

Options

Close

Curve Option Example Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Curve 1. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Least Squares Plane ID List

1 2

Before:

Option:

Curve

1

1

**Auto Execute Curve List
**

Curve 1

Y

Apply

Z

X

After:

2

1 1 1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 379

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Least Squares Method - Surface Option
**

The Least Squares method using the Surface option creates Planes that are a least squares fit to a surface. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Least Squares Plane ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to express the entity type to create the plane from. Options are Point, Curve, and Surface.

Option:

Surface

Auto Execute Surface List

Apply

Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 380

Options

Close

Surface Option Example Creates a plane based on the least squares calculated from Surface 1. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Least Squares Plane ID List

1

Before:

2 3

Option:

Surface

1

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1 Y

Apply

Z X

1

4

After:

2 3

1 1

Y Z X 1 4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 381

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Offset Method
**

The Vector Normal method creates Planes whose normal is in the direction of the specified vector and crosses the vector at a specified offset. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane Offset

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to define the plane offset from the input plane.

Plane ID List

1

**Plane Offset Distance
**

1.0

Repeat Count

1

Used to define the number of repeat. The number created planes equals the number of repeat count.

Auto Execute Plane List

Apply

Specify the Planes from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the vectors or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1 5, Coord 1.2. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 382

Options

Close

Offset Method Example Creates planes, which are parallel to Plane 1 but have a offset of 1.0 from each other. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane Offset

1

Before:

Plane ID List

2

**Plane Offset Distance
**

1.0

Repeat Count

3 Y

**Auto Execute Plane List
**

Plane 1

Z

X

Apply

After:

1

2

3

4

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 383

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method
**

Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Point Option

The Tangent method using the Point option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface at a specified point on the surface. The plane centroid will be the point location on the surface. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Surface Tangent Plane ID List

1

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Option:

Point

Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

Auto Execute Surface List Point List

Apply

Specify the point locations for the new planes. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 384

Options

Close

Point Option Example Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at Point 5. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Surface Tangent Plane ID List

1 5

Before:

2 3

Option:

Point

1

**Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

Point List

Point 5

Y Z X 1 4

Apply

After:

2 3

5 1 1

Y Z X 1 4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 385

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the Surface Tangent Method - Parametric Option
**

The Tangent method using the Parametric option creates Planes that are tangent to a specified surface at a parametric position on the surface. The plane centroid will be the tangent point on the surface. Geometry Create Action: Plane Object: Method Surface Tangent Plane ID List

1 Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Used to express the point type to create the plane from. Options are Point and Parametric. Specify the surface’s ξ 1 ( u ) and ξ 2 ( v ) coordinate value, either by using the slide bar or by entering the value in the databox. The directions of ξ1and ξ2 are defined by the connectivity of the surface or face. You can plot the ξ1 and ξ2 directions by pressing the Parametric Direction toggle on the Geometric Properties form under the menu Display/Display Properties/Geometric.

**Option: Parametric Parametric Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

u Parametric Value 0.0 1.0

0.5

**v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List
**

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Apply

Specify the surfaces from which the new planes will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 386

Options

Close

Parametric Option Example Creates a plane which is tangent to Surface 1 at the specified parametric locations. Geometry Create Action: Object: Plane Method Surface Tangent Plane ID List

1

Before:

2 3

**Option: Parametric Parametric Position 0.0 1.0
**

0.5

1

u Parametric Value

Y

0.0

1.0

0.5

Z

X

1

4

**v Parametric Value Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

After:

2 3

Apply

1

1

Y Z X 1 4

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 387

Options

Close

**Creating Planes with the 3 Points Method
**

The 3 Point method creates Planes which pass through three specified points that are not colinear. The plane centroid will be average of the first point. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane 3 Points

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Plane ID List

1

Auto Execute Point 1 List Point 2 List

Point 3List

Specify the three point locations for the new planes. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Apply

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.4 388

Options

Close

3 Points Method Example Creates a plane from Point 1:3. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Plane 3 Points

Before:

2

Plane ID List

1

**Auto Execute Point 1 List
**

Point 1 1 3

Point 2 List

Point 2 Y X Z

Point 3List

Point 3

After:

Apply

2

1 1

3

Y X Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 389

Options

Close

4.5

Creating Vectors

Creating Vectors with the Magnitude Method

The Magnitude method creates Vectors from a specified vector magnitude, direction and base point. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Magnitude

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Vector ID List

1 Used to express the coordinate values entered in the Vector Coordinates List and the Point Coordinate List, within the specified coordinate frame. Default is the global rectangular frame, Coord 0. Enter the vector coordinates to define the direction for the new vectors. Enter the coordinates either from the keyboard (Example: <10 0 0>); or cursor define the vector direction using the Vector Select menu that appears.

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Vector Direction List
**

<1 0 0>

**Vector Magnitude List
**

1.0

Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05) By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form. Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

**Auto Execute Base Point List
**

[0 0 0]

Apply

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 390

Options

Close

Magnitude Example Creates a vector based at point 1 and directing along the X axis. The vector has a magnitude of 1.0. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Magnitude

1

Before:

Vector ID List

1

**Refer. Coordinate Frame
**

Coord 0

**Vector Direction List
**

<1 0 0> Y Z X

**Vector Magnitude List
**

1.0

**Auto Execute Base Point List
**

[0 0 0]

After:

Apply

11

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 391

Options

Close

**Creating Vectors with the Interpolate Method
**

Between Two Points

The Interpolate method using the Point option will create n points of uniform or nonuniform spacing between a specified pair of point locations, where n is the number of interior points to be created. The point location pairs can be existing points, vertices, nodes or other point location provided by the Point select menu. Geometry Action: Object: Create Vector

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions. Enter the number of interior vectors you want to create.

**Method: Interpolate Vector ID List
**

5

Number of Vectors

1

Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x

**Vector Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x
**

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

Auto Execute Curves List

-ApplyMore Help:

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 392

Options

Close

Vector Interpolate Method Example Creates. Geometry Action: Object: Create Vector

Before:

**Method: Interpolate Vector ID List
**

5

Number of Vectors

1

Parameterization Method x Equal Arc Length x Equal Parametric Values x

Vector Spacing Method x Uniform x Nonuniform x

After:

Auto Execute Curves List

-Apply-

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 393

Options

Close

**Creating Vectors with the Intersect Method
**

The Intersect method creates Vectors from the intersections of pairs of Planes. The origins of the two planes will be projected onto the intersection line to determine the base and tip of the resulting vector. If the base and tip are not unique, the tip will be assumed.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Intersect
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Vector ID List

1

**Reverse Vector Direction Auto Execute Plane 1 List
**

Coord 0

Indicate whether the direction of the resulting vector should be reversed. The direction may be controlled via the order of the input planes, except when the projection of the plane origins onto the intersection line is not unique. In such a case, if desired, this toggle may be used to reverse the direction.

Plane 2 List

<1 0 0>

Apply

Specify the two planes from which the new intersection vector is to be created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 394

Options

Close

Intersect Example Creates a vector along the intersection of Plane 1 and Plane 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Intersect

2

Before:

Vector ID List

1

**Reverse Vector Direction Auto Execute Plane 1 List
**

Plane 1 Z X Y 1

Plane 2 List

Plane 2

Apply

After:

Z X Y 1 2 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 395

Options

Close

**Creating Vectors with the Normal Method
**

Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Plane Option

The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane; originating at the plane and passing through a point. The tip point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Normal
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Vector ID List

1

Option:

Plane

Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face. Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)

**Vector Magnitude List
**

1

**Auto Execute Plane List
**

Specify the planes from which the new normal vectors will be created. Either cursor select the planes or enter the IDs or definition from the keyboard. Example: Plane 1 5, x=10, Coord 0.1. The Plane Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate planes.

Point List

Apply

Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 396

Options

Close

Plane Option Example Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Plane 1. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Normal

Before:

Vector ID List

1 1

Option:

Plane

**Vector Magnitude List
**

1 Y

Auto Execute

Z X

Plane List

Plane 1

**Plane Point List
**

[0 0 0]

After:

Apply

1 1

Y Z X

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 397

Options

Close

**Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Surface Option
**

The Normal method using the Plane option creates Vectors from normal vectors to a Plane. The base point can be expressed by cartesian coordinates or by an existing vertex, node or other point location provided by the Point select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Normal
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Vector ID List

1 Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face.

Option:

Surface

Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)

**Vector Magnitude List
**

1.0

Base at Surface Centroid Auto Execute Surface List

Default Base Point will not be at the Surface Centroid. If ON, the surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base Point Listbox. Specify the surfaces from which the new normal vectors will be created. Either cursor select the surfaces or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Surface 1 5, Solid 1.2. The Surface Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate surfaces.

Base Point List

Apply

Specify the base point locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 398

Options

Close

Surface Option Example Creates a vector which is directing along the normal of Surface 1 at Point 5. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Normal

Before:

3 2

Vector ID List

1

Option:

Surface

1 5

**Vector Magnitude List
**

1.0

**Base at Surface Centroid Auto Execute Surface List
**

Surface 1

Y X 4 Z 1

**Base Point List
**

Point 5

After:

3 2

Apply

1 1 5

Y X Z

4

1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 399

Options

Close

**Creating Vectors with the Normal Method - Element Face Option
**

The Normal method using the Element Face option creates Vectors from normal vectors to an Element Face. The base point of the vector will be the element face centroid by default, but a node on the element face may also be specified.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Normal
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Vector ID List

1 Used to express the entity type to calculate vector normal from. Options are Plane, Surface, and Element Face. Enter a value to define the magnitude for the new vectors. Enter the values from the keyboard. (Examples: 1.0 1.5 .05)

**Option:Element Face Vector Magnitude List
**

1.0

Base at Surface Centroid Element Type: 2D Auto Execute Element Face List

Default Base Point will be at the Surface Centroid. If ON, the surface centroid will automatically be entered in the Base Point List box. Used to express the element type to calculate vector normal from. Options are 2D and 3D. Specify the element faces from which the new normal vectors will be created. Either cursor select the element face or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Elm 1.5. The Element Face Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate element faces.

Base Node List

Apply

Specify the base node locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Node 20.

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 400

Options

Close

Element Face 2D Option Example Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 6. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Normal

Before:

2 13 14 13 14 9 8 7 5 6 1 2 11 2 Y Z X 3 4 4 4 3 9 1 10 12 11 7 8 5 6 16 15 10 17 18 11 12 15 3 16

Vector ID List

1

**Option:Element Face Vector Magnitude List
**

1.0

**Base at Surface Centroid Element Type: 2D Auto Execute Element Face List
**

Elem 1

After:

2 13 14 13 15 3 16 16 14 17 15 9 10 18 11 8 9 12 7 1 12 5 10 11 1 6 1 7 2 11 Y X 2 3 4 4 Z 4 3 8 5 6

**Base Node List
**

Node 6

Apply

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 401

Options

Close

Element Face 3D Option Example Creates a vector along the normal of the element face at Node 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector Normal

7 6

Before:

2 3

Vector ID List

1

**Option:Element Face Vector Magnitude List
**

1.0 1 Y X 5 8 Z 4

**Base at Surface Centroid Element Type: 3D Auto Execute Element Face List
**

Elem 8

After:

2

**Base Node List
**

Node 12 6 7 3

Apply

2

1 5 X 8

1 4

Y

Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 402

Options

Close

**Creating Vectors with the Product Method
**

The Product method creates vectors of the cross products of two existing vectors. The base point of the created vector will be the base point of the first vector.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Create Vector
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next vector to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

**Method: Product Vector ID List
**

1

**Auto Execute Vector 1 List
**

Specify two vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Vector 1. The vector select menu that appears can be used to define how you want the cursor to select the appropriate vectors, coords, and planes.

Vector 2 List

-Apply-

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 403

Options

Close

Product Example Creates Vector 3, which is the cross product of Vector 1 and Vector 2. Geometry Action: Object: Create Vector

Before:

**Method: Product Vector ID List
**

3

**Auto Execute Vector 1 List
**

Vector 1 2 Y Z X 1

Vector 2 List

Vector 2

-Apply-

After:

2 1 3 1 3 Y X Z

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 404

Options

Close

**Creating Vectors with the 2 Point Method
**

The 2 Point method creates vectors between two existing point locations. The point locations can be existing points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations provided on the Point select menu.

By default, Auto Execute (p. 23) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions is ON which means you do not need to press the Apply button to execute the form.

**Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector 2 Point
**

Shows the ID that will be assigned for the next plane to be created. See Output ID List (p. 25) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions.

Vector ID List

1

**Auto Execute Base Point List
**

Specify the base and tip point locations for the new vectors. Either cursor select the point locations or enter the IDs from the keyboard. Example: Point 1 5, Curve 5.1, Node 20, Solid 10.4.2.1. The Point Select menu that appears can be used to define how you want to cursor select the appropriate points, vertices, nodes, or other point locations.

Tip Point List

Apply

• Select Menu (p. 31) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual, Part 1: Basic Functions • Topology (p. 10) • Coordinate Frame Definitions (p. 60)

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 405

Options

Close

2 Point Option Example Creates a vector starting from Point 1 and ending at Point 2. Geometry Action: Object: Method Create Vector 2 Point

Before:

2

Vector ID List

1

**Auto Execute Base Point List
**

Point 1

**Tip Point List
**

Point 2 Y Z X 1

Apply

After:

2

Y Z 1 X 1

PART 2: Geometry Modeling Create Actions §4.5 406

Options

Close